Technical application guide. Double capped fluorescent lamps: T8, T5 HE and T5 HO, T5 short and Single capped fluorescent lamps: T5 FC

Transcription

1 Technical application guide Double capped fluorescent lamps: T8, T5 HE and T5 HO, T5 short and Single capped fluorescent lamps: T5 FC Part 1: Products and Technology

2 Edition: Subject to change without notice Despite careful review, the possibility of mistakes can t be excluded no guaranty will be taken. September Copyright OSRAM GmbH. All rights reserved reproduction in whole or parts is prohibited without prior permission.

3 1 General Introduction Double capped fluorescent lamp T8, 26 mm Lamp diameter, range Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 LUMILUX Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 LUMILUX DE LUXE Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 COLOR proof Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 COLOR control Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 BIOLUX Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 FLUORA Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 NATURA Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 NATURA SPLIT Control Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 LUMILUX SPLIT Control Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 LUMILUX CHIP Control Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 COLOURED Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 LUMILUX SKYWHITE, light colour Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 ES, Energy Saver range Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 ES LUMILUX Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 XT range Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 XT LUMILUX Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 XXT range Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 XXT LUMILUX Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE LUMILUX Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE COLORED Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE LUMILUX SKYWHITE Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO LUMILUX Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO LUMILUX DE LUXE Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO COLORED Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO LUMILUX SKYWHITE Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE ES range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE LUMILUX ES Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO ES range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO ES LUMILUX Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO CONSTANT range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO XT range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO XT LUMILUX Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE and HO range for special applications Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE and HO LUMILUX SPLIT Control Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE and HO LUMILUX CHIP Control Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE SLS range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE SLS LUMILUX range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO SLS range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO SLS LUMILUX range Single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC range Single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC LUMILUX Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short BASIC Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short LUMILUX Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short LUMILUX de LUXE Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short EL, Emergency Lighting BASIC Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short EL, Emergency Lighting LUMILUX Technical design and operation... 57

4 Construction and design Operation principle Which accessories are needed to operate single and double capped fluorescent lamps? Magnetic ballasts (CCG or LLG) Starters Capacitors for power factor compensation Electronic control gear (ECG) Electronic control gear for dimmable operation Lamp data Geometric data Geometric data double capped fluorescent linear shape T8 lamps Geometric data double capped fluorescent linear shape T5 HE, HE ES, HO and HO CONSTANT lamps Geometric data double capped fluorescent linear shape T5 HE SEAMLESS lamps Geometric data double capped fluorescent linear shape T5 HO SEAMLESS lamps Geometric data single capped fluorescent circular shape T5 FC lamps Geometric data double capped fluorescent linear shape T5 Short lamps Operation modes and electrical data Electronic operation double capped fluorescent lamps T8 range Electronic operation double capped fluorescent lamps T5 range Electronic operation single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC Electronic operation double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short range Electronic operation double capped fluorescent lamps T5 EL Short, Emergency lighting range Inductive operation single - lamp circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps T8 range Inductive operation single - lamp circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short range Inductive operation series circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps T8 range Inductive operation series circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps 16 mm T5 Short range Inductive operation lead lag circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps T8 range Photometric data Light colours Colour specifications Factors affecting colour consistency Spectral distribution Radiation components in the ultra-violet range Radiation components in the infra-red range Luminous intensity distribution charts Luminance of single and double capped fluorescent lamps Lamp life and maintenance Definitions Maintenance for OSRAM circular single and linear double capped fluorescent lamps Mortality tables of OSRAM circular single and linear double capped fluorescent lamps Effect of switching operations on lamp life Circuits Operation with electronic control gear (ECG) Operation with conventional control gear (CCG) Permissible lamp/ccg combinations and system data Compensation Operation of double capped fluorescent linear shape 16 mm T5 on CCG Operation on DC sources Single and double capped fluorescent lamps in emergency lighting Operation with motion detectors and light sensors Dimensioning of automatic circuit breakers RCDs / Fault currents

5 3.7 Leakage currents Operation characteristics Start-up characteristics Single circuit, inductive operation Series circuit, inductive operation ECG operation Preheated (preheated) ECG operation Instant start (cold start) Starting at low temperatures Run-Up behaviour Operating values of the lamps as a function of mains voltage Operation values of single and double capped fluorescent lamps Luminous flux as a function of temperature and operation position Luminous flux/temperature graphs for double capped fluorescent lamps T8 in general Luminous flux/temperature graphs for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 in general Luminous flux/temperature graphs for single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC in general Operation at high temperatures Operation at low temperatures Influence of high and low temperatures on lamp colour temperature Dimming of single and double capped fluorescent lamps Lamp temperature, safety and limit values Maximum temperatures for single and double capped fluorescent lamps Maximum electrical safety values for single and double capped fluorescent lamps Striations Data for electronic gear manufacturers Electronic operation Preheated (ECG operation) Starting (ECG operation) Operating data for undimmed lamps Dimming Magnetic operation Magnetic operation 220/230 V, 50 Hz Electrical data for the filaments Relationship (ratio) between the hot resistance of the filament and the cold resistance Energy model Light fitting design, reflectors and accessories Caps, lampholders and wiring Lamp supports Distances between double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape Operation position of double capped fluorescent lamps Twin lampholders Magnetic ballast for double capped fluorescent lamps 26 mm T Electronic control gear Starters Reflectors Measuring single and double capped fluorescent lamps Ageing of lamps Operating position Photometric values Electrical measurements Temperature measurements Ambient temperature

6 7.5.2 Cold spot temperature for lamps without amalgam Measuring T5 HO CONSTANT lamps Reference lamps Single and double capped fluorescent lamps and the environment Contents Waste disposal ROHS Directive and conformity for single and double capped fluorescent lamps European and international standards Relevant standards Lamps and caps Accessories Light fittings Miscellaneous Sources Declaration of Conformity CE labelling Energy Efficiency Index Bibliography Attachments Attachment 1: Overview starter and single and double capped fluorescent lamps combinations Attachment 2: Spectral distribution for OSRAM LUMILUX light colours Attachment 3: Spectral distribution for OSRAM LUMILUX de LUXE light colours Attachment 4: Spectral distribution for OSRAM special light colours Attachment 5: Reflector information sheet Attachment 6: Fluorescent lighting What can go wrong and how to correct it Attachment 7: Fluorescent lighting Other issues to consider Attachment 8: Starters ST111 LONGLIFE compared to ST151 LONGLIFE - Construction 5

7 1 General 1.1 Introduction The OSRAM technical guide for single and double capped fluorescent lamps was developed as a reference resource for Original Equipment Manufacturers of light fittings. It is intended to be an extended document in order to help specifiers, as well as electricians and other users, in answering queries which occur daily in the industry, office and other applications. It provides support on information about: T8 LUMILUX, double capped fluorescent lamps, for magnetic and electronic control gear. T8 ES LUMILUX, Energy Saver double capped fluorescent lamps, for magnetic and electronic control gear. T8 XT LUMILUX, extended double capped fluorescent lamps, for magnetic and electronic control gear. T8 XXT LUMILUX, extra extended double capped fluorescent lamps, for magnetic and electronic control gear. T5 HE LUMILUX, High Efficiency double capped fluorescent lamps, for electronic control gear. T5 HO LUMILUX, High Output double capped fluorescent lamps for electronic control gear. T5 HE ES LUMILUX, Energy Saver double capped fluorescent lamps for electronic control gear. T5 HO ES LUMILUX, Energy Saver double capped fluorescent lamps for electronic control gear. T5 HO XT LUMILUX, extended double capped fluorescent lamps for electronic control gear. T5 HO CONSTANT LUMILUX, High Output double capped fluorescent lamps for electronic control gear. T5 HE SLS LUMILUX, High Efficiency SeamLesS double capped fluorescent lamps for electronic control gear. T5 HO SLS LUMILUX, SeamLesS double capped fluorescent lamps for electronic control gear. T5 FC LUMILUX, Circular single capped fluorescent lamps for electronic control gear. T5 Short BASIC, double capped fluorescent lamps for magnetic and electronic control gear. T5 Short LUMILUX, double capped fluorescent lamps for magnetic and electronic control gear. T5 Short LUMILUX de Luxe, double capped fluorescent lamps for magnetic and electronic control gear. T5 EL Short BASIC, Emergency Lighting double capped fluorescent lamps for magnetic and electronic control gear. T5 EL Short LUMILUX, Emergency Lighting double capped fluorescent lamps for magnetic and electronic control gear. Fluorescent lighting first started its introduction as an efficient light source for general illumination begin Since then, after many innovations it became one of the most dominant light sources of its kind. High efficacies, good light output, good maintenance, wide choices of light colour, a good (Ra > 80) up to an excellent (Ra > 90) average colour rendering index and a long life time make them very successful for all kind of applications in industrial and commercial lighting. There is no application for office, home, industry or street in which a single capped or double capped fluorescent lamp isn t or can t be applied. It is important to know that OEM s, light planners, architects, designers and end users need a perspective to get a good overview of this large and vast lamp program. In all lighting catalogues, lamp diameters of double capped fluorescent lamps are expressed by a T-number. The most commonly used T-numbers for double capped fluorescent lamps are T12, T8 and T5. What does this T-number express? The T-number informs you about the nominal diameter of the tube in units of 1/8 th converted in a metric scale with cm. T12 = 12 x cm = 3.81 cm or 38 mm T8 = 8 x cm = 2.54 cm (1 inch) or 26 mm T5 = 5 x cm = cm or 16 mm (0.125) inches or Additionally, the geometry and operation mode of fluorescent lamps for almost all lamp types comply to either the international standard IEC 60081, European standard EN (double-capped) or IEC or EN (single-capped) fluorescent lamps performance requirements. 6

8 In commercial and industrial application, general lighting lamps most commonly use lengths of 600 mm (2 feet), 900 mm (3 feet), 1200 mm (4 feet) or 1500 mm (5 feet). In the mid 1970 s, T12 38 mm double capped fluorescent lamps were replaced for ecological and economical reasons by a 26 mm T8 lamp with identical standardised lamp lengths. The efficiency and a colour rendering of the lamp was further improved by triphosphors developments, with a spectral distribution consisting of three narrow emission bands at 450 nm in the blue, 545 nm in the green and 610 nm in the red. All three wavelengths are near peaks in the CIE tristimulus functions, which are used to define colours. 1) For more information consult: Lamps and lighting J.R. Coaton A.M. Marsden: (Triphosphor) OSRAM commercialised those triphosphors light colours under the name LUMILUX. Those T8 fluorescent lamps, 26 mm diameter were able to operate in existing light fittings with conventional control gears (CCG). With the introduction of the electronic control gear (ECG), system efficiency and life time of lamp was once again improved. Nowadays T8 Lamps reach system efficiency (lamp + ECG) of 93 lm/w. With the introduction of special coating techniques, it was possible to increase the maintenance of the lamp. Loss of luminous flux is now reduced to a maximum of 10 % over an average life time of 20,000 h. In 1995, T5 HE (High Efficiency= Fluorescent High Efficiency was OSRAM first brand name) fluorescent lamps with a diameter of 16 mm were introduced to the market. OEM s worldwide now had the possibility to design and create svelte light fittings with 50 % less volume than T8 light fittings with the same degree of efficiency. The diameter of the lamp (16 mm) was decreased by 40 % compared to the previous 26 mm T8 lamps. All features of the T5 HE lamp made it possible to design smaller light fittings with an identical glare for all wattages and with a 40 % smaller reflector than that of identical T8 light fittings. One of the major innovations was that the cold spot of the lamp was shifted from 25 C to 35 C ambient temperature, so that more light was available in the light fitting at a higher ambient temperature. T5 High Efficiency lamps operate only with electronic control gears (ECGs), their system efficiency is about 96 lm/w and a lamp efficiency at about 104 lm/w (in 2011). By 1996, T5 HO (High Output= T5 Fluorescent Quintron first OSRAM brand name) fluorescent lamps allowed new possibilities by using the features of 16 mm technology, such as more luminous flux out of less lamp volume. OSRAM introduced, along with the T5 HO system, 16 mm diameter fluorescent lamps with extreme luminosity; 50 % more brightness compared to T8 fluorescent lamps in 26 mm diameter. In theory, with the T5 HO fluorescent lamps, it is possible to produce 50 % more light out of the light fitting compared to the fittings for T8 fluorescent lamps with comparable lamp lengths. The best conditions were created in order to develop svelte design orientated light fittings with high luminosity for direct and indirect illumination or for applications with high ceiling heights. In 1999, the development was temporary closed and reset for the single capped T5 system FC (Fluorescent Circline) in 16 mm lamp diameter. Advantages of the FC system: 50 % more light compared to traditional ring lamps Clear reduced shadowing effects in the light fitting as a result of the smaller lamp diameter The operation with ECG OSRAM continues to invest in the development of double capped fluorescent lamps in T8 and T5 technology to increase lamp and system features such as: Life time (extended and extra extended) Lamp and system efficiency as well as energy saving models CONSTANT (90 % luminous flux over a broader temperature range) models And a most importantly reduction of the mercury (Hg) content in compliance with the RoHs requirement 7

9 1.2 Double capped fluorescent lamp T8, 26 mm Lamp diameter, range Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 LUMILUX Benefits of the 26 mm T8 LUMILUX Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Up to 13 % more luminous flux than conventional BASIC 1) T8 lamps Up to 18 % higher luminous efficiency than conventional BASIC 1) T8 lamps Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 20,000 h 3)4) Average life time 20,000 h 3)4) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 18,000 h 3)4)5) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Good colour rendering index R a 80 compared to BASIC 1) R a Several light colours Wide range of types and wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 2) or ECG 3) Dimmable Lamp wattage Luminous flux 6) 10 W 7) 650 lm 15 W 7)8)9) 950 lm 16 W 7)8) 1,250 lm 18 W 7)8)9)10) 1,350 lm 23 W 8) 1,900 lm 30 W 7)8)9)10) 2,400 lm 36 W - 1 7)8)11) 3,100 lm 36 W 7)8)9)10 3,350 lm 38 W 8)10 3,300 lm 58 W 7)8)9)10) 5,200 lm 70W 8) 6,200 lm Light colours: LUMILUX 827 7), 830 8), 835 8, 840 8), 865 9), ) For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 5) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 5) 1) BASIC Light colours are banned out of the EU market since April 2010 in accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, first stage 2) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 4) IEC 3h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 5) For main types L18W, L36W, L58W and 16,000 h for all other T8 types 6) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature and reference control gear 7) Light colour: 827 8) Light colours: 830, 835, 840 9) Light colour: 865, reduced luminous flux, consult our website 10) Light colour: 880, reduced luminous flux, consult our website 11) Lamp length 1 m, not ErP related OSRAM T8 26 mm lamp diameter has become a classic in general illumination and is used in a wide range of applications. Many light fittings for indoor lighting, outdoor lighting, tunnel lighting and industrial lighting are built around the T8 LUMILUX fluorescent lamp. OSRAM T8 26 mm lamps in LUMILUX light colours offer up to 10 % energy savings compared with previous double capped fluorescent lamps T12, 38 mm tube diameter. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 8

10 1.2.2 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 LUMILUX DE LUXE Benefits of 26 mm T8 LUMILUX DE LUXE Good colour rendering index R a 90 Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN High luminous efficiency (lm/w) Improved luminous flux up to 4600 lm Average life time 20,000 h 2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 16,000 h 2)3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Several light colours Wide range of types and wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 1) or ECG 2) Lamp wattage Luminous flux 4) 15 W 750 lm 6) 16 W 950 lm 6) 18 W 1,100 lm 6) ; 1,150 lm 8) ; 1,200 lm 7) 30 W 1,920 lm 6) 36 W 1 5) 2,600 lm 8) 36 W 2,700 lm 6) ; 2,850 lm 8) ; 2,900 lm 7) 58W 4,350 lm 6) ; 4,550 lm 8) ; 4,600 lm 7) Light colours: LUMILUX de LUXE 930 6), 940 7), 954 8), 965 8) For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 3) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 3) 1) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 2) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 3) IEC 3h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Lamp length 1 m, not ErP concerned 6) Light colour: LUMILUX 930 7) Light colour: LUMILUX 940 8) Light colours: LUMILUX 954, 965 OSRAM 26 mm T8 LUMILUX DE LUXE lamps offer excellent colour rendering of more than R a 90 and are high efficient compared to previous versions. They are ideal for all applications in which colour rendering plays an important role and high luminous flux is needed, such as in schools, office, training rooms and retail outlets. OSRAM T8 26 mm lamps in LUMILUX DE LUXE light colours offer up to 10 % energy savings compared with previous double capped fluorescent lamps T12, 38 mm glass tube diameter. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 9

11 1.2.3 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 COLOR proof Benefits of 26 mm T8 COLOR proof In appropriated light fittings, the first fluorescent lamp for correct colour balance meets the application requirements of ISO ), 2009 MVIS 2) 1.0 and MUV 2) 1.5 Ideal for the printing industry, graphic art businesses, large photo labs and inspection and colour comparison facilities in the industry Outstanding OSRAM quality: accuracy of chromaticity coordinate, better than for u10/v10 = / in the CIE 1976 UCS chromaticity diagram, stable light and electric parameters as well as uniform coating Colour temperature 5300 K Excellent average colour rendering Index, R a = 98 First rate luminous flux maintenance and preservation of colour properties during the service life 3) Suitable for operation with CCG 4) or ECG 5) Lamp wattage Luminous flux 6) 18 W 900 lm 36 W 2,150 lm 58 W 3,350 lm Light colour 8) : COLOR proof 950 For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 3)7) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 3)7) 1) ISO 3664 defines the requirements for colour matching in the printing industry. The requirements of this standard shown here relate to light fittings and lamps 2) The index of metamerism in the visible (MVIS) and ultra violet area (MUV) describes the colour difference between pairs of colour samples which is observed when the type of lighting is changed. The colour pairs have shown no difference in colour for lighting with the standard spectrum D50: the colours are perceived as identical, i.e. the indices of metamerism equal zero The smaller the indices for artificial lighting the more the light approaches D50 and the reliable and suitable is the light source for colour matching. 3) The service life for this special application is considered the point in time when the lamp and its colour properties are still maintained 4) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 5) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 6) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 7) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 8) Light colours, consult our website Outstanding OSRAM Quality, precise colour location, uniform coating, stable light and electrical data. It is ideal for the print industry, graphic workshops, photographic laboratories, industrial inspection and colour matching facilities. In dentist practices, for example, crowns can be perfectly matched to the patient s natural tooth colour. In reprographic workshops, prints can be checked und optimum daylight conditions. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 10

12 1.2.4 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 COLOR control Benefits of 26 mm T8 COLOR control Fluorescent lamps with effective UV protection Special synthetic material sleeves put over the lamps glass reduce, by 99 %, the UV amount for wave lengths below 440 nm produced by the lamp Bleaching of sensitive products is reduced over longer exposition period damage factor < 0.1 according to CIE 157:2004-Control of damage to museum objects by optical radiation Threshold according to ISO (document storage requirements for archive and library materials) up to 400 nm: 75 µw/lm, COLOR control has a value of < 0.1 µw/lm Minimum decrease in luminous flux over service life time Service life time 10,000 h 2)3), after this operation time all lamps have to be replaced Good average colour rendering index R a 90 Several light colours Wide range of wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 1) or ECG 2) Lamp wattage Luminous flux 4) 18 W 1,100 lm 5) ; 1,150 lm 6) 36 W 2,700 lm 5) ; 2,750 lm 6) 58 W 4,300 lm 5) ; 4,350 lm 6) Light colours: COLOR control 954 UVS 5), 940 UVS 6) For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Service life time CCG operation: 10,000 h 3) Service life time ECG preheated operation: 10,000 h 3) 1) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage becomes effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 2) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 3) IEC 3h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Light colour: 954 UVS, consult our website 6) Light colour: 940 UVS, consult our website The excellent colour rendering of these lamps make them ideal for lighting systems in museums, exhibitions, art galleries and trade fairs. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. OSRAM COLOR control fluorescent lamps with synthetic material sleeve are only suited for operation in open light fittings. The operation of COLOR control fluorescent lamps in closed light fitting isn t supported by OSRAM. The end user should control regularly in the application, the synthetic material sleeve its state of quality in the light fitting on all installed T8 COLOR control lamps, which are operated longer than their published service life time. Under this operation condition, it can t be avoided that the synthetic sleeve may start to age quickly and become brittle. This kind of operation isn t recommended and isn t supported by OSRAM. For more information consult our website: 11

13 1.2.5 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 BIOLUX Benefits of 26 mm T8 BIOLUX Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Average life time 20,000 h 2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 5,000 h 3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Colour temperature 6500 K Excellent average colour rendering index, R a 90 Wide range of wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 1) or ECG 2) Lamp wattage Luminous flux 4) 18 W 1,000 lm 30 W 1,600 lm 36 W 2,300 lm 58 W 3,700 lm Light colour 5) : BIOLUX 965 For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 3) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 3) 1) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage becomes effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 2) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 3) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Light colours, consult our website BIOLUX - light that gives your pets a feeling of well being. BIOLUX fluorescent lamps from OSRAM produce a daylight white light which gives your pets a sense of natural sun light. Reptiles, turtles, invertebrates and amphibians are kept in captivity on a location with particularly little natural daylight and need a complementary illumination with a daylight spectrum to remain healthy. Additionally, the light of BIOLUX fluorescent lamps, because of its spectral distribution, is ideal for raising small pets (birds, small rodents) in a terrarium or fish in aquaria (marine water or fresh water aquaria). They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 12

14 1.2.6 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 FLUORA Benefits of 26 mm T8 FLUORA Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Average life time 20,000 h 2)3) (50% failed lamps allowed) Service life time 5,000 h 2)3) (80% installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Particularly strong at blue and red ends of the spectral light distribution Ideal for promoting photo-biological processes in plants Wide range of wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 1) or ECG 2) Lamp wattage Luminous flux 4) 15 W 400 lm 18 W 550 lm 30 W 1,000 lm 36 W 1,400 lm 58 W 2,250 lm Light colour 5) : FLUORA 77 For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 3) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 3) 1) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage becomes effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 2) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 3) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Light colour, consult our website FLUORA lamps are used wherever plants, flowers, seeds do not receive enough natural daylight, e.g. small greenhouses, florist shops, flower window, aquaria and terrariums, interior plant scape in shopping centres, offices, hotels and home. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 13

15 1.2.7 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 NATURA Benefits of 26 mm T8 NATURA Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Average life time 20,000 h 2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 5,000 h 2)3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) According to DIN 10504, the light colour of OSRAM T8 NATURA is particularly suitable for the food sector The specially tailored spectral distribution ensures that food is presented in an appetizing light Light colour 76, make meat, sausages, bread, cakes and other foods look fresh and appealing without disguising poor produce Wide range of wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 1) or ECG 2) Lamp wattage Luminous flux 4) 15 W 500 lm 18 W 750 lm 30 W 1,300 lm 36 W 1 6) 1,600 lm 36 W 1,800 lm 58 W 2,850 lm Light colour 5) : NATURA 76 For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 3) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 3) 1) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 2) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 3) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Light colour, consult our website: 6) Lamp length 1 m, not ErP concerned OSRAM NATURA is designed for operation with CCG or ECG in open en closed light fittings. Application area: food trade, bakery, fishmongers, dairy goods, fruit, vegetables, meat, sausages, pies. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 14

16 1.2.8 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 NATURA SPLIT Control Benefits of 26 mm T8 NATURA SPLIT Control Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Average life time 20,000 h 2)3) (50% failed lamps allowed) Service life time 5,000 h 2)3) (80% installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) According to DIN 10504, the light colour of OSRAM T8 NATURA is particularly suitable for the food sector The complete T8 lamp NATURA SPLIT Control is covered with an integral protective sleeve Fully protected by the sleeve, they meet the requirements of the international food standard The specially tailored spectral distribution ensures that food is presented in an appetizing light Light colour 76, make meat, sausages, bread, cakes and other foods look fresh and appealing with disguising poor produce Wide range of wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 1) or ECG 2) NATURA SPLIT Control is suited for operation in open and closed light fittings Lamp wattage Luminous flux 4) 18 W 730 lm 30 W 1,260 lm 36 W 1,740 lm 58 W 2,760 lm Light colour 5) : NATURA 76 SPS For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 3) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 3) 1) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 2) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 3) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Light colour, consult our website: OSRAM NATURA SPLIT Control is designed for operation with CCG or ECG in open and in closed light fittings. Application area: food trade, bakery, fishmongers, dairy goods, fruit, vegetables, meat, sausages, pies. NATURA SPLIT Control is suited for operation in open and closed light fittings, and is identified by a green ring marker. Compared to earlier versions of these lamps, the sleeve material is more heat resistant. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. OSRAM NATURA SPLIT Control is suited to operate in open and closed light fittings. In the application, the end user should control at regular time intervals (in the light fitting) the integral protective sleeve its state of quality on all installed OSRAM NATURA SPLIT Control lamps, which are operated longer than their published service life time. Under those operation conditions, it can t be avoided that the integral protective sleeve its material may start to age quickly and become brittle. This kind of operation isn t recommended and isn t supported by OSRAM. After 20,000 h operation under standard conditions all lamps need to be replaced in order to fulfil stated technical data. 15

17 For more information consult our website: Safety instructions: Lamps with integral protective sleeve: Maximum ambient temperature: 80 C Minimum ambient temperature : -10 C Maximum storage time: 5 0 C up to 30 C ambient temperature Replacement average life time (B50) recommended In case of lamp breakage: 16

18 1.2.9 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 LUMILUX SPLIT Control Benefits of 26 mm T8 LUMILUX SPLIT Control Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN The complete T8 lamp LUMILUX SPLIT Control is covered with an integral protective sleeve Fully protected by the sleeve, they meet the requirements of the international food standard Up to 13 % more luminous flux than conventional BASIC 1) T8 lamps Up to 18 % higher luminous efficiency than conventional BASIC 1) T8 lamps Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 20,000 h 3)4) ) Average life time 20,000 h 3)4) (50% failed lamps allowed) Service life time 18,000 h 3)4) (80% installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Good average colour rendering index R a 80 (BASIC R a 50 79) Several light colours Wide range of types and wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 2) or ECG 3) LUMILUX SPLIT Control is suited for operation in open and closed light fittings Lamp wattage Luminous flux 5) 18 W 1,300 lm 36 W 3,250 lm 58 W 5,100 lm Light colour 6) : LUMILUX 840 SPS SPLIT Control For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 4) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 4) 1) BASIC Light colours are banned out of the EU market since April 2010 in accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, first stage 2) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 4) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 5) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colours, consult our website: It is essential to avoid impurities due to glass splinters in sensitive production areas, especially in the food industry. In the unlike event of a lamp breaking the LUMILUX SPLIT Control design ensures that no glass splinters and phosphor can escape thanks to the plastic sleeve that is attached to the lamp glass and lamp caps. These lamps are recommended for companies certified in accordance with the International Food Standard, particularly if they are operated in open light fittings. Since 1998 the Food Hygiene Directive has anchored the hazard analysis and critical control point (HACCP) concept in German law. The use of LUMILUX SPLIT Control lamps supports the implementation of the HACCP concepts for production through to merchandise presentation. LUMILUX SPLIT Control is suited for operation in open and closed light fittings, and is identified by a green ring marker. Compared to earlier versions of these lamps, the sleeve material is more heat resistant. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. 17

19 In the application, the end user should control at regular time intervals (in the light fitting) the integral protective sleeve its state of quality on all installed OSRAM LUMILUX SPLIT Control lamps, which are operated longer than their published service life time. Under those operation conditions, it can t be avoided that the integral protective sleeve its material may start to age quickly and become brittle. This kind of operation isn t recommended and isn t supported by OSRAM. After 20,000 h operation under standard conditions all lamps need to be replaced in order to fulfil stated technical data. For more information consult our website: Safety instructions: Lamps with integral protective sleeve: Maximum ambient temperature: 80 C Minimum ambient temperature : -10 C Maximum storage time: 5 0 C up to 30 C ambient temperature Replacement average life time (B50) recommended In case of lamp breakage: 18

20 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 LUMILUX CHIP Control Benefits of 26 mm T8 LUMILUX CHIP Control Standardised geometry in accordance to IEC or EN The complete T8 lamp LUMILUX CHIP Control is covered with a yellow integral protective sleeve Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 20,000 h 2)3) ) Average life time 20,000 h 2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 16,000 h 2)3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Suitable for operation with CCG 1) or ECG 2) LUMILUX CHIP Control is suited for operation in open and closed light fittings Lamp wattage Luminous flux 4) 18 W 970 lm 36 W 2,300 lm 58 W 3,830 lm Light colour 5) : LUMILUX 62 CHIP Control For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 3) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 3) 1) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 2) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 3) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Light colours, consult our website: LUMILUX CHIP Control is ideal for microchip fabrication plants and other places where UV radiation and light from the blue end of the spectrum are unwanted (print shops e.g.) for exposing printing plates and also in which splinter protection is required and colour effects are also wanted. LUMILUX CHIP Control is suited for operation in open and closed light fittings, and is identified by a green ring marker. Compared to earlier versions of these lamps, the sleeve material is more heat resistant. In the application, the end user should control at regular intervals in the light fitting the integral protective sleeve its state of quality on all installed OSRAM LUMILUX CHIP Control lamps, which are operated longer than their published service life time. Under those operation conditions, it can t be avoided that the integral protective sleeve its material may start to age quickly and become brittle. This kind of operation isn t recommended and isn t supported by OSRAM. After 20,000 h operation under standard conditions all lamps need to be replaced in order to fulfil stated technical data. If a lamp should burst, the sleeve fixed around the glass tube ensures that shards cannot escape. The sleeve also blocks nearly all UV and blue radiation. Under standard conditions acc. IEC (free burning, C ambient temperature) a typical increase of the emitted radiation power in the wavelength range < 500 nm up to 3.0 mw/klm per 10,000 hours of operation was determined. This corresponds to approx. 0.1% of the total emitted radiation power. For applications in photo sensitive areas OSRAM recommends routine maintenance and lamp replacements if required. For example for a T5 HO lamp at 80 C ambient temperature an increase of the emitted radiation power in the wavelength range < 500 nm of up to 20.0 mw/klm per 10,000 hours of operation was observed. 19

21 This corresponds to approx. 0.7% of the total emitted radiation power. This increase depends on the operation conditions. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: Safety instructions: Lamps with integral protective sleeve: Maximum ambient temperature: 80 C Minimum ambient temperature : -10 C Maximum storage time: 5 0 C up to 30 C ambient temperature Replacement average life time (B50) recommended In case of lamp breakage: 20

22 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 COLOURED Benefits of 26 mm T8 COLOURED Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Several colours: Red, Green, Blue, Yellow (see CHIP CONTROL ) Wide range of types and wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 1) or ECG 2) Lamp wattage Luminous flux 3) 18 W 900 lm 2) ; 1,800 lm 3) ; 400 lm 4) 30 W 600 lm 5) 36 W 2,400 lm 2) ; 4,400 lm 3) ; 900 lm 4) 58W 3,830 lm 2) ; 6,700 lm 3) ; 1,600 lm 4) Light colours: consult our website 60 (Red) 5), 66 (Green) 6), 67 (Blue) 7), 62 (see Chip Control, yellow) For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 4) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 4) 1) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 2) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 3) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 4) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 5) Light colour: Red, for more information consult our website: 6) Light colour: Green, for more information consult our website: 7) Light colour: Blue, for more information consult our website: OSRAM T8 26 mm lamp diameter COLOURED has become a classic in RGB or RGB W illumination and is used in a wide range of applications. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For yellow colour, we recommend the use of LUMILUX CHIP control. For more information consult our website: 21

23 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 LUMILUX SKYWHITE, light colour 880 Benefits of 26 mm T8 LUMILUX SKYWHITE light colour 880 Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Characterized by an impressive quality of light Emit a large proportion of blue light in the wavelength range of 410 nm to 460 nm, so very close to the character of DAYLIGHT Improves contrast and reduces fatigue, boost mental and physical performance High luminous flux and high efficiency up to 85 lm/w Colour temperature 8000 K Good average colour rendering index R a 80 Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 20,000 h 2)3) Average life time 20,000 h 2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 18,000 h 2)3)4) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Wide range of wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 1) or ECG 2) Lamp wattage Luminous flux 5) 18 W 1,300 lm 30 W 2,350 lm 36 W 3,010 lm 38 W 2,975 lm 58 W 4,900 lm Light colour: SKYWHITE 880 6) For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 3) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 3) 1) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 2) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 3) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Service Life time 16,000 h for L 30 W and L 38 W 5) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colour: 880, reduced luminous flux, consult our website LUMILUX SKYWHITE is the ideal choice wherever high levels of concentration, attentiveness and well-being are needed in conjunction with special visual requirements: Corporate and public buildings in stairways and corridors, single and open scape offices, conference rooms and hospitality rooms Modern industrial plants and production complexes day and night. Including shift work Fitness centres, training rooms, class rooms, retail premises and medical practices, rest home For best optical results it s recommended to use LUMILUX SKYWHITE in light fittings for direct/indirect illumination. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 22

24 1.3 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 ES, Energy Saver range Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 ES LUMILUX Benefits of the 26 mm T8 LUMILUX ENERGY SAVER Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Instant energy saver alternatives for existing systems with conventional/low loss control gear 2) (CCG/LLG) and released current constant electronic control gear 3) (ECG preheated) Ideal substitute for T8 BASIC 1) lamps in existing installations with CCG 3 lamp wattages available Energy saving up to 14 % possible, depend on the control gear, compared to conventional BASIC 1) T8 lamps Payback time less than 1 year T8 LUMILUX ENERGY SAVER achieve their maximum luminous flux at ca. 30 C ambient lamp temperature Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 20,000 h 3)4) Average life time 13,000 h 2)4) or 20,000 h 3)4) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Increased service life time 12,000 h 2)4) or 18,000 h 3)4) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) compared to T8 BASIC 1) lamps (5,000 h) Average colour rendering index R a 80 (BASIC 1) R a 50 79) Several light colours Lamp wattage Luminous flux 16 W (590 mm) 1,100 lm 5) ; 1,300 lm 6) 32 W (1200 mm) 2,650 lm 5) ; 3,000 lm 6) 51 W (1500 mm) 4,200 lm 5) ; 4,800 lm 6) Light colours: LUMILUX 830 7), 840 7) For CCG and ECG current constant, preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 13,000 h 4) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 4) 1) BASIC Light colours are banned out of the EU market since April 2010 in accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, first stage 2) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG current constant preheated QT-FIT 4) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 5) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Luminous flux at 30 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 7) Light colours: 830, 840. For more information consult our website 26 mm T8 BASIC lamps, are banned since April 2010 out of the European market, operated in indoor light fittings with CCG/LLG control gear for preheated starter operation can be replaced by 26 mm T8 LUMILUX ENERGY SAVER. Under those conditions 10 % energy saving can be directly realised by retrofit for an identical illumination level. Lamp power is reduced; its optimum luminous flux is reached at ca. 30 C lamp ambient temperature in the light fitting. 26 mm T8 LUMILUX ENERGY SAVER is suited to be operated in reflector light fittings and closed light fittings. In open light fitting without reflector luminous flux can decrease while the optimum lamp ambient temperature is below 30 C with its environment. 23

25 If in an installation in which light fittings are already operated with 26 mm T8 LUMILUX lamps, a retrofit with 26 mm T8 LUMILUX ENERGY SAVER lamps isn t recommended without double check of the illumination level. The illumination level will be lower than the planned value for 26 mm T8 LUMILUX. Only a 10 % energy saving will be realised for a lower illumination level. T8 LUMILUX Replacement ES 16 W T8 BASIC 18 W 26 mm T8 LUMILUX 18 W T8 LUMILUX Replacement ES 32 W T8 BASIC 36 W 26 mm T8 LUMILUX 36 W T8 LUMILUX Replacement ES 51 W T8 BASIC 58 W 26 mm T8 LUMILUX 58 W Full replacement No replacement with the same light output It is possible to operate T8 LUMILUX ES in combination with ECG, in this case energy saving will depend of the variety of the ECG (current constant or power controlled). Both ECG varieties are represented in large numbers in existing lighting applications in the market. Energy saving is realised in the recommended optimum temperature range when T8 LUMILUX ES are operated with current constant ECG in the application. There is no energy saving when T8 LUMILUX ES lamps are operated with power controlled ECG. The combination QUICKTRONIC QT-FIT 8 as optimum solution for ECG operation with T8 LUMILUX ES is released by OSRAM. T8 LUMILUX ES are not released for applications with dimmable ECG. The lamp(s) may operate under instable operation conditions depending on the dimmable level. T8 LUMILUX ES are sensitive to air flow; draught; this can lead to a reduced luminous flux. 24

26 T8 LUMILUX ES 16 W T8 LUMILUX ES 32 W T8 LUMILUX ES 51 W replaces replaces replaces T8 BASIC 18 W T8 BASIC 36 W T8 BASIC 58 W ECG operation Emergency light systems Dimmable operation STOP According to the VDE 1) the existing approval for the light fitting (ENEC 10 VDE 2) ) does not cover operation with a T8 energy saving lamp Not suitable for emergency light systems Different versions of ECG s are available in the market. In almost all cases there is no energy saving but a decrease of luminous flux Not released for operation with power controlled ECG s Not released for dimmable operation Low ambient temperature (< 20 C in the light fitting) Care -full Cold lamps flicker whenever they are switched-on and will show instability during operation In this temperature range all T8 energy saver lamps available in the market, reach about 50 % less luminous flux than standard T8 lamps, because maximum luminous flux is achieved at a 30 C lamp ambient temperature in the light fitting High ambient temperature (> 30 C in the light fitting) Operation with QT- FIT8 or conventional control gear GO Similar luminous flux as with T8 BASIC lamps Up to 14 % energy saving possible Flicker free operation In accordance with a safety risk analysis (EN 61347) operation with QT-FIT8 has been released German marking institute ENEC 10 VDE mark indicates the light fitting has been tested and approved in accordance to EN most onerous national deviation included 25

27 1.4 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 XT range Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 XT LUMILUX Benefits of the 26 mm T8 LUMILUX XT Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 44,000 h 5) CCG operation or 50,000 h 5) ECG 3) operation XT = extended Trust Average life time 50,000 h 5) ECG 3) operation, 28,000 h 4) or 44,000 h 5) CCG operation (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 42,000 h 5) ECG 3) operation, 21,000 h 4) or 35,000 h 5) CCG operation (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Good average colour rendering index R a 80 (BASIC R a 50 79) 1) Several light colours Wide range wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 2) or ECG 3) Dimmable (100 % down to 25 % lamp power) Lamp wattage Luminous flux 6) 18 W 7) 1,350 lm 18 W 8) 1,250 lm 36 W 7) 3,300 lm 36 W 8) 3,250 lm 58 W 7) 5,200 lm 58 W 8) 5,000 lm Light colours: LUMILUX 830, 840, 865 For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 28,000 h 4), 44,000 h 5) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 50,000 h 5) 1) BASIC Light colours are banned out of the EU market since April 2010 in accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, first stage 2) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 4) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 5) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 6) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 7) Light colours: 830, 840 8) Light colour: 865, reduced luminous flux, consult our website OSRAM LUMILUX XT lamps are used in installations in which relamping can take place without disturbing normal operations and does not lead to additional costs as a result of downtime for production or processes, for example outside normal opening or working hours in department stores, warehouses and subways. OSRAM 26 mm T8 XT LUMILUX lamps offer up to 10 % energy savings compared with previous double capped fluorescent lamps T12, 38 mm tube diameter. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. Best 26 mm T8 XT LUMILUX / starter combination is: See and attachment 1. OSRAM ST171 SAFETY, ST172 SAFETY, ST173 SAFETY OSRAM ST111 LONGLIFE, ST151 LONGLIFE OSRAM ST111 HT LONGLIFE For more information consult our website: 26

28 1.5 Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 XXT range Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 XXT LUMILUX Benefits of the 26 mm T8 XXT LUMILUX Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN XXT = extra extended Trust Maintenance: 90% luminous flux at 63,000 h 5) CCG operation or 90,000 h 5) ECG 3) operation Average life time 80,000 h 4) or 90,000 h 5) ECG 3) operation, 44,000 h 4) or 63,000 h 5) CCG operation (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 75,000 h 5) ECG 3) operation or 40,000 h 4) CCG operation (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Good average colour rendering index R a 80 (BASIC R a 50 79) 1) Several light colours Wide range wattages Suitable for operation with CCG 2) or ECG 3) Dimmable (100 % down to 25 % lamp power) Lamp wattage Luminous flux 6) 18 W 7) 1,350 lm 18 W 8) 1,250 lm 36 W 7) 3,300 lm 36 W 8) 3,250 lm 58 W 7) 5,200 lm 58 W 8) 5,000 lm Light colours: LUMILUX 830, 840, 865 For CCG and ECG preheated operation G13 lamp cap Average life time CCG operation: 44,000 h 4), 63,000 h 5) Average life time ECG preheated operation: 80,000 h 4), 90,000 h 5) 1) BASIC Light colours are banned out of the EU market since April 2010 in accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, first stage 2) Conventional Control Gear: high loss gear EEI class > D or low loss gear EEI class C. In accordance to the European commission regulation n 245/2009 of March 2009, Energy related Products directive, third stage become effective in April Only CCG EEI class A2 will be allowed to be sold in the EU market 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 4) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 5) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 6) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 7) Light colours: 830,840 8) Light colour: 865, reduced luminous flux, consult our website OSRAM LUMILUX XXT lamps are ideally used in installations in which relamping cannot take place without disturbing normal operations and leads to additional costs as a result of downtime for production or processes, for example in factories operating round the clock, high-bay warehouses, stations, tunnels, illuminated signage, drilling platforms and mines. OSRAM 26 mm T8 lamps in XXT LUMILUX offer up to 10 % energy savings compared with previous double capped fluorescent lamps T12, 38 mm tube diameter. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. Best 26 mm T8 XXT LUMILUX / starter combination is: See and attachment 1. OSRAM ST171 SAFETY, ST172 SAFETY, ST173 SAFETY OSRAM ST111 LONGLIFE, ST151 LONGLIFE OSRAM ST111 HT LONGLIFE For more information consult our website: 27

29 1.6 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE LUMILUX Benefits of the 16 mm T5 HE LUMILUX Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN mm shorter lamp length than 26 mm T8 lamp length, therefore smaller light fittings are possible Identical luminance for all lamp wattages of 1.7 cd/cm², mixing of different T5 HE lamp wattages is possible Maximum luminous flux is maintained at 35 C lamp ambient temperature Lamp efficiency up to 104 lm/w, up to 10 % higher lamp efficiency compared to 26 mm T8 lamps LUMILUX Up to 8 % more light thanks to much less self-shading from the slimmer lamp Same degree of glare with 40 % smaller reflectors dimensions Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 24,000 h 1)2)3) Average life time 24,000 h 1)2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 19,000 h 1)2)3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Good average colour rendering index R a 80 Several light colours Wide range of wattages Only suitable for operation with ECG 1), no release or standardisation for CCG operation Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 14 W 6) 1,200 lm 1,350 lm 14 W 7) 1,100 lm 1,300 lm 14 W 8) 1,080 lm 1,150 lm 21 W 6) 1,900 lm 2,100 lm 21 W 7) 1,750 lm 2,000 lm 21 W 8) 1,700 lm 1,850 lm 28 W 6) 2,600 lm 2,900 lm 28 W 7) 2,400 lm 2,750 lm 28 W 8) 2,350 lm 2,690 lm 35 W 6) 3,320 lm 3,650 lm 35 W 7) 3,050 lm 3,500 lm 35 W 8) 3,000 lm 3,450 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) Light colours: LUMILUX 827, 830, 830, 840, 865, 880 for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 24,000 h 2) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colours: 827, 830, 835, 840 for more information see 7) Light colours: 865 for more information see 8) Light colours: 880 for more information see HE stands for High Efficiency. The system offers excellent properties such as good luminous flux behaviour, impressive economy and improved environmental compatibility. 28

30 16 mm T5 HE lamps are designed for internal light fitting temperatures of 30 C to 40 C. The optimum (maximum) luminous flux is achieved at about 35 C. Applications: offices, administrative buildings, indoor sport facilities, factory light, hotels, schools, home. 16 mm T5 HE systems are suited to operate in open and closed light fittings. For more information consult our website: 29

31 1.6.2 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE COLORED Benefits of the 16 mm T5 HE COLORED Several colours; Red, Green, Blue Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN mm shorter lamp length than 26 mm T8 lamp length, therefore smaller light fittings are possible Maximum luminous flux is maintained at 35 C lamp ambient temperature Up to 8 % more light thanks to much less self-shading from the slimmer lamp Same degree of glare with 40 % smaller reflectors dimensions Average life time 24,000 h 1)2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Wide range of wattages Only suitable for operation with ECG 1), no release or standardisation for CCG operation Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 14 W 6) 930 lm 970 lm 14 W 7) 1,550 lm 1,600 lm 14 W 8) 300 lm 330 lm 21 W 6) 1,500 lm 1,550 lm 21 W 7) 2,500 lm 2,650 lm 21 W 8) 500 lm 540 lm 28 W 6) 2,100 lm 2,200 lm 28 W 7) 3,500 lm 3,700 lm 28 W 8) 700 lm 750 lm 35 W 6) 2,650 lm 2,800 lm 35 W 7) 4,450 lm 4,700 lm 35 W 8) 875 lm 950 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) Light colours: LUMILUX 60 red, 66 green, 67 blue for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation 1) G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 24,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) IEC 3h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colour: Red for more information see 7) Light colour: Green for more information see 8) Light colour: Blue for more information see HE stands for High Efficiency. The system offers excellent properties such as good luminous flux behaviour, impressive economy and improved environmental compatibility. 16 mm T5 HE lamps are designed for internal light fitting temperatures of 30 C to 40 C. The optimum (maximum) luminous flux is achieved at about 35 C. OSRAM T5 16 mm HE lamp COLORED has become a classic in RGB or RGB W illumination. 16 mm T5 HE systems are suited to operate in open and closed light fittings. For more information consult our website: 30

32 1.6.3 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE LUMILUX SKYWHITE Benefits of the 16 mm T5 HE SKYWHITE Characterized by an impressive quality of light Emits a large proportion of blue light in the wavelength range of 410 nm to 460 nm, very close to the character of DAYLIGHT Improves contrast and reduces fatigue, boosts mental and physical performance Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Identical luminance for all lamp wattages therefore the mixing of different T5 HE lamp wattages is possible High luminous flux and high efficiency up to 99 lm/w Colour temperature 8000 K Good average colour rendering index R a 80 Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 24,000 h 1)2)3) Average life time 24,000 h 1)2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 19,000 h 1)2)3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Wide range of wattages Only for ECG 1) operation Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 14 W 1,080 lm 1,150 lm 21 W 1,700 lm 1,850 lm 28 W 2,350 lm 2,690 lm 35 W 3,000 lm 3,450 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) Light colour: SKYWHITE 880 for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 24,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear T5 HE LUMILUX SKYWHITE is the ideal choice wherever high levels of concentration, attentiveness and wellbeing are needed in conjunction with special visual requirements: Corporate and public buildings in stairways and corridors, single and open plan offices, conference rooms and hospitality rooms Modern industrial plants and production complexes day and night. Including shift work Fitness centres, wellness rooms, training rooms, class rooms, retail premises and medical practices, rest home For best optical results it s recommended to use T5 HE LUMILUX SKYWHITE in light fittings for direct/indirect illumination. They are designed to operate with QUICKTRONIC ECG Preheated. For more information consult our website: 31

33 1.7 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO LUMILUX Benefits of the 16 mm T5 HO LUMILUX Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN mm shorter lamp length than 26 mm T8 lamp length, therefore smaller light fittings are possible Maximum luminous flux is maintained at about 35 C lamp ambient lamp temperature Lamp efficiency from 83 lm/w up to 100 lm/w, up to 10 % higher lamp efficiency compared with 26 mm T8 lamps Up to 8 % more light thanks to much less self-shading from the slimmer lamp Same degree of glare with 40 % smaller reflectors dimensions Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 24,000 h 1)2)3) Average life time 24,000 h 1)2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 19,000 h 1)2)3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Good average colour rendering index R a 80 Several light colours Wide range of wattages Only suitable for operation with ECG 1), no release or standardisation for CCG operation Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 24 W 6) 1,750 lm 2,000 lm 24 W 7) 1,600 lm 1,900 lm 24 W 8) 1,550 lm 1,750 lm 39 W 6) 3,100 lm 3,500 lm 39 W 7) 2,850 lm 3,325 lm 39 W 8) 2,750 lm 3,150 lm 49 W 6) 4,310 lm 4,900 lm 49 W 7) 4,100 lm 4,600 lm 49 W 8) 4,050 lm 4,610 lm 54 W 6) 4,450 lm 5,000 lm 54 W 7) 4,100 lm 4,750 lm 54 W 8) 4,000 lm 4,500 lm 80 W 6) 6,150 lm 7,000 lm 80 W 7) 5,700 lm 6,650 lm 80 W 8) 5,550 lm 6,400 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) Light colours: LUMILUX 827, 830, 835, 840, 865, 880 for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 24,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colours: 827, 830, 835, 840 for more information see 7) Light colours: 865 for more information see 8) Light colours: 880 for more information see 32

34 HO stands for High Output. The system offers excellent properties such as good luminous flux behaviour, impressive economy and improved environmental compatibility. T5 HO double capped fluorescent lamps have different luminance values for different lamp wattages and can therefore not be mixed in an installation. 16 mm T5 HO lamps are designed for internal light fitting temperatures of 30 C to 40 C. The optimum (maximum) luminous flux is achieved at 35 C. Applications: Offices, administrative buildings, public buildings, factory lighting, industry, hotels, schools, shops, home. 16 mm T5 HO systems are suited to operate in open and closed light fittings. This lamp system is particularly noted for its very high luminous flux, opening up new areas of application such as lighting for rooms with very high ceilings. For more information consult our website: 33

35 1.7.2 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO LUMILUX DE LUXE Benefits of the 16 mm T5 HO LUMILUX DE LUXE Excellent average colour rendering index R a 90 Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN mm shorter lamp length than 26 mm T8 lamp length, therefore smaller light fittings are possible Maximum luminous flux is maintained at an ambient temperature of 35 C Lamp efficiency up to 79 lm/w Up to 8 % more light thanks to much less self-shading from the slimmer lamp Same degree of glare with 40 % smaller reflectors dimensions Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 20,000 h 1)2)3) Average life time 20,000 h 1)2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 19,000 h 1)2)3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Different light colours Wide range of wattages Only suitable for operation with ECG 1), no release or standardisation for CCG operation Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 24 W 6) 1,400 lm 1,570 lm 24 W 7) 1,400 lm 1,570 lm 49 W 6) 3,500 lm 3,850 lm 49 W 7) 3,450 lm 3,795 lm 54 W 6) 3,800 lm 4,250 lm 54 W 7) 3,800 lm 4,250 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) Light colours: LUMILUX 940, 965 for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation 1) G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 24,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colours: 940 for more information see 7) Light colours: 965 for more information see HO stands for High Output. The system offers excellent properties such as good luminous flux behaviour, impressive economy and improved environmental compatibility. T5 HO LUMILUX DE LUXE double capped fluorescent lamps have different luminance values for different lamp wattages and can therefore not be mixed in an installation. 16 mm T5 HO LUMILUX DE LUXE lamps are designed for internal light fitting temperatures of 30 C to 40 C, the optimum (maximum) luminous flux is achieved at about 35 C. Applications: museums, public buildings and shops. 16 mm T5 HO LUMILUX DE LUXE systems are suited to operate in open and closed light fittings. For more information consult our website: 34

36 1.7.3 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO COLORED Benefits of the 16 mm T5 HO COLORED Several colours: red, green, blue Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN mm shorter lamp length than 26 mm T8 lamp length, therefore smaller light fittings are possible Maximum luminous flux is maintained at about 35 C lamp ambient temperature Average life time 24,000 h 1)2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Wide range of wattages Only suitable for operation with ECG 1), no release or standardisation for CCG operation Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 24 W 6) 1,500 lm 1,650 lm 24 W 7) 2,500 lm 2,750 lm 24 W 8) 525 lm 670 lm 39 W 6) 2,450 lm 2,700 lm 39 W 7) 4,100 lm 4,475 lm 39 W 8) 850 lm 1,075 lm 54 W 6) 3,300 lm 3,650 lm 54 W 7) 5,550 lm 6,050 lm 54 W 8) 1,150 lm 1,475 lm 80 W 6) 4,525 lm 5,000 lm 80 W 7) 7,650 lm 8,300 lm 80 W 8) 1550 lm 2025 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) Light colours: LUMILUX 60 red, 66 green, 67 blue for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation 1) G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 24,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colour: Red for more information see 7) Light colour: Green for more information see 8) Light colour: Blue for more information see HO stands for High Output. The system offers excellent properties such as good luminous flux behaviour, impressive economy and improved environmental compatibility. 16 mm T5 HO lamps are designed for internal light fitting temperatures of 30 C to 40 C. The optimum (maximum) luminous flux is achieved at about 35 C. OSRAM T5 16 mm HO lamp COLORED has become a classic in RGB or RGB W illumination. 16 mm T5 HE systems are suited to operate in open and closed light fittings. For more information consult our website: 35

37 1.7.4 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO LUMILUX SKYWHITE Benefits of the 16 mm T5 HO SKYWHITE Characterized by an impressive quality of light Emits a large proportion of blue light in the wavelength range of 410 nm to 460 nm, very close to the character of DAYLIGHT High luminous flux and high efficiency up to 94 lm/w Colour temperature 8000 K Average colour rendering index R a 80 Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Improves contrast and reduces fatigue, boost mental and physical performance Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 24,000 h 1)2)3) Average life time 24,000 h 1)2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 19,000 h 1)2)3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Wide range of wattages Only for ECG 1) operation Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) 24 W 1,550 lm 1,750 lm 39 W 2,750 lm 3,150 lm 49 W 4,050 lm 4,610 lm 54 W 4,000 lm 4,500 lm 80 W 5,550 lm 6,400 lm Light colour: SKYWHITE 880 for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation 1) G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 24,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear T5 HO LUMILUX SKYWHITE is the ideal choice wherever high levels of concentration, attentiveness and wellbeing are needed in conjunction with special visual requirements: Corporate and public buildings in stairways and corridors, single and open plan offices, conference rooms and hospitality rooms Modern industrial plants and production complexes day and night. Including shift work Fitness centres, wellness rooms, training rooms, class rooms, retail premises and medical practices, rest home For best optical results it s recommended to use T5 HO LUMILUX SKYWHITE in light fittings for direct/indirect illumination. They are designed to operate with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. For more information consult our website: 36

38 1.8 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE ES range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE LUMILUX ES Benefits of T5 HE LUMILUX ES Energy saving up to 10 % possible depends on the control gear, compared to traditional T5 HE LUMILUX lamps Payback time less than 1 year 8) Instant energy saver alternatives for existing systems with current constant electronic control gear 1) (ECG non-dimmable) With QICKTRONIC BAT current constant ECG this lamp can achieve an efficiency up to 116 lm/w at 35 C ambient lamp temperature Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Direct substitute for T5 HE LUMILUX lamps Several light colours T5 HE LUMILUX ENERGY SAVER achieve their maximum luminous flux at about 35 C lamp ambient temperature Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 24,000 h 1)2)3) Identical average life time 24,000 h 1)2)3) (50% failed lamps allowed as for T5 HE LUMILUX lamps Identical service life time 19,000 h 1)2)3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) as T5 HE LUMILUX lamps Good average colour rendering index R a 80 Only for operation with ECG 1) Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) 25 W 6) 2,450 lm 2,900 lm 25 W 7) 2,260 lm 2,750 lm 32 W 6) 3,100 lm 3,650 lm 32 W 7) 2,870 lm 3,500 lm Light colours: LUMILUX 827, 830, 840, 865 for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation, current constant 1) G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 24,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated current constant 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colours: 827, 830, 840 for more information see 7) Light colours: 865 for more information see 8) Can vary depending on individual regional conditions 37

39 T5 HE ES LUMILUX (High Efficient Energy Saver) lamps in operation with non dimmable current control ECG, offer energy savings of up to 10 % with no loss of light compared to standard T5 HE LUMILUX (High Efficiency) lamps. T5 HE LUMILUX ES 25 W Replacement T5 HE LUMILUX 28 W T5 HE LUMILUX ES 32 W Replacement T5 HE LUMILUX 35 W Full replacement when operated with non-dimmable current constant ECG If T5 HE ES LUMILUX lamps are operated with OSRAM QUICKTRONIC power controlled ECG e.g. QTi DALI/DIM: About 10 % more light in non-dimmed operation (100 % operation) 100 % luminous flux at 90 % dimming level. T5 HE ES LUMILUX lamps are released for dimming down to a level of 1 % with all new OSRAM QUICKTRONIC QTi DALI/DIM. T5 HE ES LUMILUX lamps are quick low cost energy saving alternatives to existing and new systems. By simply replacing the lamp(s) on an existing installation on a one to one basis it is possible to achieve cost savings and contribute to environmental protection. Ideal for indoor light systems, e.g. offices, shopping centers and general illumination. Replaceability and planning for light colours 830 and 840: Standard Replacement Standard=Planning value at 25 C (lm) Replacement value at 25 C (lm) HE28W HE 25W ES 2,600 2,450 2,900 HE35W HE 32W ES 3,320 3,100 3,650 Max. value at 35 C for standard and replacement (lm) At 25 C, the HE ES Lamps have a luminous flux of up to 6 % less than the standard T5 HE LUMILUX lamps Due to the usage of high quality phosphors in the ES Lamps, an optimal luminous flux is however achievable at 35 C As such in planning tools such as DIALUX, in order that the eventual illuminance is correctly calculated, the planning values (high lighted in green) are to be taken into consideration For more information consult our website: 38

40 1.9 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO ES range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO ES LUMILUX Benefits of T5 HO ES LUMILUX Instant energy saver alternatives for existing systems with electronic control gear 1) current constant (ECG non-dimmable) With QICKTRONIC BAT current constant ECG this lamp can achieve efficiency up to 108 lm/w at 35 C lamp ambient temperature Direct substitute for T5 HO LUMILUX lamps Different light colours Energy saving up to 10 % possible with current constant ECG, compared to standard T5 HO LUMILUX lamps Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Payback time less than 1 year 8) T5 HO ES LUMILUX ENERGY SAVER achieve their maximum luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 24,000 h 1)2)3) Identical average life time 24,000 h 1)2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed as for T5 HO LUMILUX lamps Identical service life time 19,000 h 1)2)3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) as T5 HO LUMILUX lamps Average colour rendering index R a 80 Only for operation with ECG 1) Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 45 W 6) 4,310 lm 4,900 lm 45 W 7) 4,100 lm 4,600 lm 50 W 6) 4,450 lm 5,000 lm 50 W 7) 4,100 lm 4,750 lm 73 W 6) 6,150 lm 7,000 lm 73 W 7) 5,700 lm 6,650 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) Light colours: LUMILUX 827, 830, 840, 865 for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation, current constant 1) G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 24,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated current constant 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colours: 827, 830, 840 for more information see 7) Light colours: 865 for more information see 8) Can very depending on individual regional conditions T5 HO ES LUMILUX (High Output Energy Saver) lamps in operation with non dimmable current control ECG, offer energy savings of up to 10 % with no loss of light compared with standard T5 HO LUMILUX (High Efficiency) lamps. 39

41 T5 HO LUMILUX ES 45 W Replacement T5 HO LUMILUX 49 W T5 HO LUMILUX ES 50 W Replacement T5 HO LUMILUX 54 W T5 HO LUMILUX ES 73 W Replacement T5 HO LUMILUX 80 W No replacement STOP T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT Full replacement when operated with non-dimmable ECG current constant No replacement possible If T5 HO ES LUMILUX lamps in operation with OSRAM QUICKTRONIC power controlled ECG e.g. QTi DALI/DIM: About 10 % more light in non-dimmed operation (100 % operation) 100 % luminous flux at 90 % dimming level. T5 HO ES LUMILUX lamps are released for dimming down to a level of 1 % with all new OSRAM QUICKTRONIC QTi DALI/DIM. T5 HO ES LUMILUX lamps are quick low cost energy saving alternatives to existing and new systems. By simply replacing the lamp(s) on an existing installation on a one to one basis it is possible to achieve cost savings and contribute to environmental protection. Ideal for indoor light systems, e.g. for factories, warehouses and other rooms with high ceilings and outdoor lighting systems, e.g. for tunnels (with appropriated light fittings and ECG). Replaceability and planning for light colours 830 and 840: Standard Replacement Standard=Planning value at 25 C Replacement value at 25 C (lm) (lm) HO 49 W HO 45 W ES 4,310 4,310 4,900 HO 54 W HO 50 W ES 4,450 4,450 5,000 HO 80 W HO 73 W ES 6,150 6,150 7,000 Max. value at 35 C for standard and replacement (lm) 40

42 At 25 C, the HO ES Lamps have a luminous flux of up to 6 % less than the standard T5 LUMILUX lamps Due to the usage of high quality phosphors in the ES Lamps, an optimal luminous flux is however achievable at 35 C As such in planning tools such as DIALUX, in order that the eventual illuminance is correctly calculated, the planning values (highlighted in green) are to be taken into consideration For more information consult our website: 41

43 1.10 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO CONSTANT range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT Benefits of T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT The perfect solution for applications in cold and hot environment 90 % luminous flux can be achieved in a lamp ambient temperature from 5 C up to 70 C. Exception T5 HO 49 W CONSTANT, 90 % luminous flux can be achieved in a lamp ambient temperature from 20 C up to 80 C Direct substitute for T5 HO LUMILUX lamps Several light colours Up to 15 % increased efficiency factor in high and low temperature light fitting developed for standard T5 HO LUMILUX Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 24,000 h 1)2) Identical average life time 24,000 h 1)2)3) (50 % failed lamps allowed as for T5 HO LUMILUX lamps Identical service life time 19,000 h 1)2)3) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) as T5 HO LUMILUX lamps Average colour rendering index R a 80 T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT is released for dimming down to a level of 1 % luminous flux with new optimized QTi DIM 4) Only for operation with ECG 1) 16 mm T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 5) 24 W 7) 1,900 lm 2,000 lm 24 W 8) 1,840 lm 1,900 lm 39 W 7) 3,400 lm 3,500 lm 39 W 8) 3,225 lm 3,325 lm 49 W 7) 4,450 lm 4,900 lm 49 W 8) 4,235 lm 4,600 lm 54 W 7) 4,850 lm 5,000 lm 54 W 8) 4,610 lm 4,750 lm 80 W 7) 6,800 lm 7,000 lm 80 W 8) 6,450 lm 6,650 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 6) Light colours: LUMILUX 830, 840, 865 for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation. G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 24,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 4) For the latest information about dimming T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT consult our website 5) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 7) Light colours: 830, 840 for more information see 8) Light colours: 865 for more information see 16 mm T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamps are ideal for applications with a wide ambient temperature range for indoor and outdoor light systems. Applications: illumination from production area, warehouses, rooms with high ceilings, parking, cool houses and tunnel (with appropriated light fittings and ECG). For more information consult our website: 42

44 1.11 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO XT range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO XT LUMILUX Benefits of T5 HO XT LUMILUX XT = extended Trust, longer life and smaller premature failure rate means extreme reliability Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 45,000 h 2)3) ECG 1) operation Average life time 45,000 h 2)3) ECG 1) operation (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 30,000 h 2)3) ECG 1) operation (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Good average colour rendering R a 80 Several light colours Wide range wattages Only for operation with ECG 1) Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 49 W 6) 4,310 lm 4,900 lm 49 W 7) 4,100 lm 4,600 lm 54 W 6) 4,450 lm 5,000 lm 54 W 7) 4,100 lm 4,750 lm 80 W 6) 6,150 lm 7,000 lm 80 W 7) 5,700 lm 6,650 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) Light colours: LUMILUX 827, 830, 840, 865 for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation 1) G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 45,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 3) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colours: 827, 830, 840 for more information see 7) Light colours: 865 for more information see OSRAM T5 HO 16 mm lamp diameter has become a classic in general illumination and is used in a wide range of applications. Many light fittings in indoor lighting, outdoor lighting, tunnel lighting and industrial lighting are very difficult to access which increase the maintenance costs in those facilities. This increase in maintenance costs can be avoided when 16 mm T5 HO XT LUMILUX lamps are installed in the light fittings. OSRAM T5 16 mm lamps in HO XT LUMILUX offer maintenance costs saving compared with previous double capped fluorescent lamps T5 16 mm HO LUMILUX. T5 HO XT LUMILUX lamps are designed to operate with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. For more information consult our website: 43

45 1.12 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE and HO range for special applications Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE and HO LUMILUX SPLIT Control Benefits of 16 mm T5 HE and HO LUMILUX SPLIT Control The lamp glass and lamp caps from the T5 lamps HE and HO LUMILUX SPLIT Control are covered with an integral protective sleeve Fully protected by the sleeve, they meet the requirements of the international food standard Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 20,000 h 1)3)4)5) or 24,000 h 2)3)4)5) Average life time 20,000 h 1)3)4)5) or 24,000 h 2)3)4)5) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 16,000 h 1)3)4)5) or 18,000 h 2)3)4)5) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Good average colour rendering index R a 80 Several light colours Only for operation with ECG 3) LUMILUX SPLIT Control is suited for operation in open and closed light fittings Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 6) HE 28 W SPS 2,540 lm 2,830 lm HO 54 W SPS 4,350 lm 4,890 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 7) Light colour: LUMILUX 840 SPS SPLIT Control for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation 3) G5 lamp cap Average life time HE, ECG preheated operation: 20,000 h 4)5) Average life time HO, ECG preheated operation: 24,000 h 4)5) 1) T5 HE 16 mm diameter 2) T5 HO 16 mm diameter 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 4) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 5) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 6) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 7) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear It is essential to avoid impurities due to glass splinters in sensitive production areas, especially in the food industry. In the unlike event of a lamp breaking the LUMILUX SPLIT Control design ensures that no glass splinters and phosphor can escape thanks to the integral protective sleeve that is attached to the lamp glass and lamp caps. These lamps are recommended for companies certified in accordance with the International Food Standard, particularly if they are operated in open light fittings. Since 1998 the Food Hygiene Directive has anchored the hazard analysis and critical control point (HACCP) concept in German law. The use of LUMILUX SPLIT Control lamps supports the implementation of the HACCP concepts for production through to merchandise presentation. LUMILUX SPLIT Control is suited for operation in open and closed light fittings, and is identified by a green ring marker. Compared to earlier versions of these lamps, the sleeve material is more heat resistant. 44

46 In the application, the end user should control at regular intervals in the light fitting the integral protective sleeve its state of quality on all installed OSRAM HE or HO LUMILUX SPLIT Control lamps, which are operated longer than their published service life time. Under those operation conditions, it can t be avoided that the integral protective sleeve its material may start to age quickly and become brittle. This kind of operation isn t recommended and isn t supported by OSRAM. After 20,000 h operation under standard conditions all lamps need to be replaced in order to fulfil stated technical data. For more information consult our website: Safety instructions: Lamps with integral protective sleeve: Maximum ambient temperature: 80 C Minimum ambient temperature : -10 C Maximum storage time: 5 0 C up to 30 C ambient temperature Replacement average life time (B50) recommended In case of lamp breakage: 45

47 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE and HO LUMILUX CHIP Control Benefits of 16 mm T5 HE and HO LUMILUX CHIP Control The lamp glass and lamp caps from the T5 HE and HO lamps LUMILUX CHIP Control are covered with a yellow integral protective sleeve Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 20,000 h 1)3) or 24,000 h 2)3)4)5) Average life time 20,000 h 1)3)4)5) or 24,000 h 2)3)4)5) (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 16,000 h 1)3)4)5) or 18,000 h 2)3)4)5) (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Wide range of types and wattages Only for operation with ECG 3) LUMILUX CHIP Control is suited for operation in open and closed light fittings Optimum luminous flux Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux HE at 25 C 6) at 35 C 7) 28 W 1,830 lm 2,040 lm HO 54 W 3,140 lm 3,530 lm Light colour: LUMILUX 62 CHIP Control for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation 3) G5 lamp cap Average life time T5 HE, ECG operation (preheated): 20,000 h 4)5) Average life time T5 HO, ECG (preheated) operation: 24,000 h 4)5) 1) T5 HE 16 mm diameter 2) T5 HO 16 mm diameter 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 4) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 5) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 6) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 7) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear T5 HE or HO LUMILUX CHIP Control is ideal for microchip fabrication plants and other places where UV radiation and light from the blue end of the spectrum are unwanted (print shops e.g.) for exposing printing plates and also in which splinter protection is required. T5 HE or HO LUMILUX CHIP Control is suited for operation in open and closed light fittings and is identified by a green ring marker. Compared to earlier versions of these lamps, the sleeve material is more heat resistant. In the application, the end user should control at regular intervals in the light fitting the integral protective sleeve its state of quality on all installed OSRAM HE or HO LUMILUX Chip Control lamps, which are operated longer than their published service life time. Under those operation conditions, it can t be avoided that the integral protective sleeve its material may start to age quickly and become brittle. This kind of operation isn t recommended and isn t supported by OSRAM. After 20,000 h operation under standard conditions all lamps need to be replaced in order to fulfil stated technical data. If a lamp should burst, the sleeve fixed around the glass tube ensures that shards cannot escape. The sleeve also blocks nearly all UV and blue radiation. Under standard conditions acc. IEC (free burning, C ambient temperature) a typical increase of the emitted radiation power in the wavelength range < 500 nm up to 6.0 mw/klm per 10,000 hours of operation was determined. 46

48 This corresponds to approx. 0.2% of the total emitted radiation power. For applications in photo sensitive areas OSRAM recommends routine maintenance and lamp replacements if required. For example for a T5 HO lamp at 80 C ambient temperature an increase in the emitted radiation power in the wavelength range < 500 nm of up to 20.0 mw/klm per 10,000 hours of operation was observed. This corresponds to approx. 0.7 % of the total emitted radiation power. This increase depends on the operation conditions. T5 HE and HO LUMILUX CHIP Control is designed to operate with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. For more information consult our website: Safety instructions: Lamps with integral protective sleeve: Maximum ambient temperature: 80 C Minimum ambient temperature : -10 C Maximum storage time: 5 0 C up to 30 C ambient temperature Replacement average life time (B50) recommended In case of lamp breakage: 47

49 1.13 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE SLS range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE SLS LUMILUX range Benefits of 16 mm T5 HE SLS LUMILUX Continuous lighting without shadows More design options possible with new lamp geometry Identical luminance for all HE wattages of 1.7 cd/cm 2, mixing of different lamp wattages possible Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 18,000 h 2)3) ECG 1) operation Average life time 18,000 h 2)3) ECG 1) operation, operation (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 16,000 h 2)3) ECG 1) operation (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Good average colour rendering index R a 80 Different light colours Dimmable with OSRAM QUICKTRONIC QTi DALI Dim, Temperature range >15 C dimming level 1 % up to 100 % luminous flux Only for operation with ECG 1) Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 14 W 6) 1,200 lm 1,350 lm 21 W 6) 1,900 lm 2,100 lm 28 W 6) 2,600 lm 2,900 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) Light colours: LUMILUX 830, 840 for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation 1) G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 18,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 3) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colours: 830, 840 for more information see Up to now, it was very difficult to realise a continuous light line in cove illumination with a minimum of dark spots, shadowing or overlapping. Now T5 HE SLS LUMILUX lamps overcome this limit of double capped fluorescent lamps and make light systems possible without annoying shadows. A minimal distance between both lamp ends of 5 mm has to be respected. Applications: hotels, restaurants, office lighting, shop lighting, airports, promenades and museum. T5 HE SLS LUMILUX lamps are designed to operate with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. For more information consult our website: 48

50 1.14 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO SLS range Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO SLS LUMILUX range Benefits of 16 mm T5 HO SLS LUMILUX Continuous lighting without shadows More design options possible with new lamp geometry Maintenance: 90 % luminous flux at 18,000 h 2)3) ECG 1) operation Average life time 18,000 h 2)3) ECG 1) operation, operation (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 16,000 h 2)3) ECG 1) operation (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Good average colour rendering index R a 80 Several light colours Wide range wattages T5 HO SLS LUMILUX 39 W and 54 W lamps are dimmable with OSRAM QUICKTRONIC QTi DALI Dim, temperature range >15 C dimming level 1 % up to 100 % luminous flux. Exception T5 HO SLS LUMILUX 24 W lamps are not released for dimming in general Only for operation with ECG 1) Mixing T5 HO SLS wattages not possible, difference in luminance Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 24 W 6) 1,750 lm 2,000 lm 24 W 7) 1,650 lm 1,900 lm 39 W 6) 3,100 lm 3,500 lm 39 W 7) 2,900 lm 3,325 lm 54 W 6) 4,450 lm 5,000 lm 54 W 7) 4,050 lm 4,750 lm Optimum luminous flux at 35 C 5) Light colours: LUMILUX 830, 840, 865 for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation 1) G5 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 18,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on, 1 h off) 3) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 6) Light colours: 830, 840 for more information see 7) Light colours: 865 for more information see As like T5 HO types, T5 HO SEAMLESS possess a different luminance for each lamp power. Therefore in an installation different wattages should not be mixed to avoid a different impression in light colours, resp. brightness. 49

51 Up to now, it was very difficult to realise a continuous light line in cove illumination with a minimum of dark spots, shadowing or overlapping. Now T5 HO SLS LUMILUX lamps overcome this limit of double capped fluorescent lamps and make lighting systems possible without annoying shadows. A minimal distance between both lamp ends from 5 mm has to be respected. Different luminance for all T5 HO SLS LUMILUX wattages makes mixing of different lamp wattages impossible. Different brightness between T5 HO SLS LUMILUX light sources leads to intensity differences which are percept by the human eye as a colour temperature difference. Use only one specific lamp wattage of T5 HO SLS LUMILUX lamps in your application. Applications: hotels, restaurants, office lighting, shop lighting, Airports, promenades and museum. T5 HO SLS LUMILUX lamps are designed to operate with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. For more information consult our website: 50

52 1.15 Single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC range Single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC LUMILUX Benefits of 16 mm T5 FC LUMILUX Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Attractive all round solution More light fitting design options possible with new lamp geometry Slim lamp, low profile light fitting High intensity circular light fitting Efficiency up to 85 lm/w Maintenance: 75 % luminous flux at 12,000 h 2)3) ECG 1) operation Average life time 12,000h 2)3) ECG 1) operation, operation (50 % failed lamps allowed) Service life time 8,000 h 2)3) ECG 1) operation (80 % installation luminous flux, see 2.4.1) Good average colour rendering index R a (80-89) Several light colours Dimmable with OSRAM QUICKTRONIC QTi DALI Dim Only for operation with ECG 1) Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 22 W 5) 1,800 lm 22 W 6) 1,710 lm 40 W 5) 3,400 lm 40 W 6) 3,300 lm 55 W 5) 4,200 lm 55 W 6) 3,800 lm Light colours: LUMILUX 827 5), 830 5), 840 5), 865 6) for more information consult our website For ECG preheated operation 1) 2GX13 lamp cap Average life time ECG preheated operation: 12,000 h 2)3) 1) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 2) 12 h switching cycle (11 h on,1 h off) 3) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Light colours: 827, 830, 840 6) Light colour: 865 Designers and architects are looking for suitable alternatives to standard strip lighting. They appreciate round light fittings that will blend in perfectly with the architecture in their environment. The circular T5 FC LUMILUX system paves the way to unconventional high intensity circular light fittings with so many different uses for FC 22 W, 40 W and 55 W. The circular shape T5 FC LUMILUX single capped fluorescent lamp enables designers to create round small light fittings which emit light in all directions. Applications: hotels, restaurants, office lighting, shops and museum. T5 FC LUMILUX is designed to operate with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated. For more information consult our website: 51

53 1.16 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short BASIC Benefits of 16 mm T5 Short BASIC Slim lamp, low profile light fitting Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Efficiency up to 64 lm/w 1)4)7) Average life time 8,000 h 2)6) CCG 1) operation, (50 % failed lamps allowed) T5 Short L 4 W ECG 3) preheated operation, average life time 6,000 h 2) T5 Short L 6 W, L 8 W, L13W ECG 3) preheated operation, average life time 10,000 h 2) Average colour rendering index R a 60 4) up to 70 5) Light colours 640 and 765 For operation with CCG 1) and ECG 3) Suitable for furniture and emergency lighting Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 4 W 1)2)4)7) 140 lm 6 W 1)2)4)7) 270 lm 8 W 1)2)5)7) 330 lm 8 W 1)2)4)7) 385 lm 13 W 1)2)5)7) 720 lm 13 W 1)2)4)7) 830 lm Light colours: BASIC 640, 765 for more information consult our website For CCG +starter preheated operation or ECG preheated operation G5 lamp cap 1) Conventional Control Gear, CCG + starter preheated circuit 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 4) Light colour: 640 5) Light colour: 765 6) Excluding L4W average life time of 6,000 h on CCG operation 7) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear Applications: T5 Short BASIC L 4 W L 13 W lamps are mainly used for applications with limited space that request an economic solution: Emergency lighting, escape signs, signs for safety lighting, signs for stand-by lighting. Decoration and furniture lighting: cabinets, mirrors, shelves, signage. T5 Short BASIC is designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated or battery with emergency lighting unit. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 52

54 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short LUMILUX Benefits of 16 mm T5 Short LUMILUX Slim lamp, low profile light fitting Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Efficiency up to 73 lm/w 1)4) Maintenance: 70 % luminous flux at 5,600 h 2) CCG 1) operation Average life time 8,000 h 2) CCG 1) operation, (50 % failed lamps allowed) Average life time 10,000 h 2) ECG 3) operation, (50 % failed lamps allowed) Average colour rendering index R a 80 Light colours 827, 830, 840 For operation with CCG 1) and ECG 3) Suitable for furniture and emergency lighting Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 6 W 6) 300 lm 8 W 5)6)7) 430 lm 13 W 5)6)7) 950 lm Light colours: LUMILUX 827,830, 840 for more information consult our website For CCG +starter preheated operation or ECG preheated operation G5 lamp cap 1) Conventional Control Gear, CCG + starter preheated circuit 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Light colour: 840 6) Light colour: 830 7) Light colour: 827 Applications: T5 Short L 6 W L 13 W lamps are mainly used for applications with limited space that request an economic solution: Emergency lighting, escape signs, signs for safety lighting, signs for stand-by lighting. Decoration and furniture lighting: cabinets, mirrors, shelves, signage T5 Short LUMILUX is designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated or battery with emergency lighting unit. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 53

55 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short LUMILUX de LUXE Benefits of 16 mm T5 Short LUMILUX de LUXE Slim lamp, low profile light fitting Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Efficiency up to 52 lm/w 1)4) Maintenance: 70 % luminous flux at 5,600 h 2) CCG 1) operation Average life time 8,000 h 2) CCG 1) operation, (50 % failed lamps allowed) Average life time 10,000 h 2) ECG 3 operation, (50 % failed lamps allowed) Average colour rendering index R a 90 Light colours 930, 954 For operation with CCG 1) and ECG 3) Suitable for furniture and emergency lighting Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 6 W 5) 260 lm 8 W 5)6) 380 lm 13 W 5)6) 680 lm Light colours: LUMILUX de LUXE 930, 954 for more information consult our website For CCG +starter preheated operation or ECG preheated operation G5 lamp cap 1) Conventional Control Gear, CCG + starter preheated circuit 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear 5) Light colour: 930 6) Light colour: 954 Applications: T5 Short LUMILUX de LUXE L 6 W L 13 W lamps are mainly used for applications with limited space that request an economic solution: Emergency lighting, escape signs, signs for safety lighting, signs for stand-by lighting. Decoration and furniture lighting: cabinets, mirrors, shelves, signage T5 Short LUMILUX de LUXE is designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated or battery with emergency lighting unit. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 54

56 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short EL, Emergency Lighting BASIC Benefits of 16 mm T5 EL Short BASIC Specially designed electrode coil for emergency lighting Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Modified filling pressure to reach best results in emergency lighting Improved reliability for emergency lighting Slim lamp, low profile light fitting Efficiency up to 48 lm/w Average life time 4,000 h 2) CCG 1) operation, (50 % failed lamps allowed) Average life time 10,000 h 2) ECG 3) operation, (50 % failed lamps allowed) Average colour rendering index R a 60 Light colour 640 For operation with CCG 1) and ECG 3) Suitable for furniture and emergency lighting Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 6 W 270 lm 8 W 385 lm Light colours: BASIC 640 1) for more information consult our website For CCG +starter preheated operation or ECG preheated operation (emergency lighting with battery) G5 lamp cap 1) Conventional Control Gear, CCG + starter preheated circuit 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear Applications: T5 EL Short BASIC L 6 W L 8 W lamps are mainly used for applications with limited space that request an economic solution: Emergency lighting, escape signs, signs for safety lighting, signs for stand-by lighting. Decoration and furniture lighting: cabinets, mirrors, shelves Signage With 6 W and 8 W EL Lamps, a life expectancy of up to 10,000 hours can however be expected if the correct electrical parameters are applied and strictly adhered to. They are designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated or battery with emergency lighting unit. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 55

57 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short EL, Emergency Lighting LUMILUX Benefits of 16 mm T5 EL Short LUMILUX Specially designed electrode coil for emergency lighting Standardised data in accordance to IEC or EN Modified filling pressure to reach best results in emergency lighting Improved reliability for emergency lighting Slim lamp, low profile light fitting Efficiency up to 56 lm/w 1)4) Minimum decrease in luminous flux over life time (maintenance: 70 % luminous flux at 4,000 h 2) CCG 1) operation) Average life time 4,000 h 2) CCG 1) operation, operation (50 % failed lamps allowed) Average colour rendering index R a 80 Light colour 840 For operation with CCG 1) and ECG 3) Suitable for furniture and emergency lighting Lamp wattage Luminous flux Nominal luminous flux at 25 C 4) 6 W 1) 320 lm 8 W 1) 450 lm Light colours: LUMILUX 840 for more information consult our website For CCG +starter preheated operation or ECG preheated operation (emergency lighting with battery) G5 lamp cap 1) Conventional Control Gear, CCG + starter preheated circuit 2) IEC 3 h switching cycle (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) 3) Electronic Control Gear, ECG preheated 4) Luminous flux at 25 C ambient temperature, operated with reference control gear Applications: T5 EL Short LUMILUX L 6 W L 8 W lamps are mainly used for applications with limited space that request an economic solution: Emergency lighting, escape signs, signs for safety lighting, signs for stand-by lighting. Decoration and furniture lighting: cabinets, mirrors, shelves Signage With the 6 W and 8 W EL Lamps, a life expectancy of up to 10,000 hours can however be expected if the correct electrical parameters are applied and strictly adhered to. T5 EL Short LUMILUX is designed to operate with CCG or with QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated or battery with emergency lighting unit. If used in starter circuits, these lamps can operate with standard control gear and recommended capacitors. For more information consult our website: 56

58 1.17 Technical design and operation Construction and design Fig. 1: Assembly of a double capped fluorescent T8 26 mm lamp Principal components of a double capped fluorescent lamp: 2) For more information consult: Taschenbuch der Lampentechnik, OSRAM 1 The discharge tube: It consists of a lead free glass tube, at which the glass must meet high requirements such as Electric insulation strength Processability and impermeability to gas High light transmission in visible range Entire suppression of ultra violet radiation 2 The electrode: Coil (triple coil cathode or stick coil) made out of a very fine tungsten wire, coated with a layer of alkaline earth carbonate as emitter. This alkaline earth carbonate emitter has to be converted during production to an alkaline earth oxide. To realise that process it is necessary to heat up the tungsten coil to a high temperature so that the carbonate changes into an oxide. After this reaction is finished, another chemical reaction is necessary to reduce the electron work function of the electrode-emitter system where atomic barium is released and transported to the surface of the emitter. To realise that process, 100 h aging of the single and a double capped fluorescent lamp at full system power is necessary. For stable operation of the lamp, dimensioning and choice of the ballast has a vital importance to the electrode coils and life time of the lamp. 57

59 3 Electrode shield or GeMeDis (Ge=Getter; Me=Mercury; Dis=Dispenser) Band: Metal band on which mercury is dosed and released in the vacuum in the manufacturing process. Complementary this metal band act as an electrode shield and avoid lamp glass blacking. 4 Lead wires: Hold the clamped cathode and is made out of several parts. The inner part could be made out of nickel or steel or an alloy of nickel-iron. The middle part is a kind of wire (dumet) especially made for the glass-to-metal seal. The outer part of the lead wire is made out of copper platted iron or any other material. 5 The flare and stem: Make it possible to create a vacuum-sealed electrical glass joint between the glass discharge tube, the electrode coil (cathode) and the lead wires to the cap pins. 6 Gas filling: Inside the sealed glass tube a near-vacuum prevails low pressure of an inert gas or a mixture of it and saturated mercury vapour. Mercury vapour pressure depends on the temperature of the liquid mercury, which condenses at the coolest place in the lamp. This is the so called cold spot. A typically Hg vapour pressure for a single or double capped fluorescent lamp may be at 1.0 Pa or 7.5 x 10-3 torr. Commonly used gases are krypton and argon (partly mixed) at pressures of around 200 to 650 Pa. To vary lamp voltage and lamp wattage, it is possible to use gas mixtures in which neon and or xenon is included. 7 Phosphor coating and protective layer: Between the lamp glass of the tube and the phosphor a special layer in form of an alumina is added as barrier preventing sodium ions migration from the glass to the discharge and reacting with the mercury, it avoids darkening of the phosphor and reduces the decrease of the luminous flux over life time of the lamp. The use of a protective coating allows the use of a small mercury quantity so that little mercury is prevented from consumption processes by the phosphor and the lamp glass over the lamp life time. The phosphor converts the generated UV-Radiation into visible light. The efficiency and colour rendering of the lamp was further improved by LUMILUX triphosphors developments, with a spectral distribution consisting of three narrow emission bands at 450 nm in the blue, 545 nm in the green and 610 nm in the red. All three wavelengths are near peaks in the CIE tristimilus functions, which are used to define colours. 1) For more information consult: Lamps and lighting J.R. Coaton A.M. Marsden: (Triphosphor) 8 The lamp cap: ensure a stable mechanic support with the glass tube and a safe insulation for optimised electric contact in the lamp socket. Double capped fluorescent lamps 26 mm T8 are executed with a standardised lamp cap G13 according to the international standard IEC , , Lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the control of interchangeability and safety Part 1: Lamp caps. See sheet , page 1 and 2. Double capped fluorescent lamps 16 mm T5 are executed with a standardised lamp cap G5 according to the international standard IEC , , Lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the control of interchangeability and safety Part 1: Lamp caps. See sheet , page 1 to 3. Single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC 16mm are executed with a standardised lamp cap 2Gx13 according to the international standard IEC , , Lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the control of interchangeability and safety Part 1: Lamp caps. See sheet page 1 and 2 58

60 Operation principle Phosphor UV-radiation Electrode Electron Fig. 2: Operation principle of a fluorescent lamp 2) For more information consult: Taschenbuch der Lampentechnik, OSRAM Atom nucleus Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 26 mm, T5 HE, HO 16 mm and single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC are low pressure mercury lamps. The low pressure discharge method of generating light is one of the most economic. They operate on the following principle: Fluorescent lamps contain mercury vapour and inert gas. When current flows in the discharge tube, the electrons released out of the electrode hit the mercury atoms. Energy is transferred to the mercury electrons pushing them in higher orbits around the atom. When these electrons fall back to their original orbits, they release this energy in the form of UV radiation. The UV radiation is converted in visible (radiation) light by the phosphor coating on the inner surface of the glass bulb. Different phosphors are available for this purpose, if well mixed it is possible to produce any desired colour temperature and colour rendering. High or low efficacy of the lamp is defined by the composition of the phosphor. Triphosphors OSRAM LUMILUX - allow the highest efficacy and a good colour rendering R a 80. OSRAM LUMILUX DE LUXE phosphors realise a continuous spectrum, with a good up to very good colour rendering R a > 90 up to 98, but with a lower efficacy as OSRAM LUMILUX lamps. High luminous efficacy (the relationship between luminous flux and power consumption) is achieved when an optimum mercury vapour pressure exists in the discharge tube. This depends on the temperatures on the inner tube wall and is regulated by the vapour pressure of mercury and its condensation at the cool zones ( cold spot ) of the discharge tube. 59

61 Cold spot of a T8 26 mm fluorescent lamp The cold spot of a T8 26 mm fluorescent lamp is located in the middle of the glass tube length. See Fig. 3. The temperature at this cold spot depends to some extent on the operation position of the lamp and the ambient temperature. Cold spot location Fig. 3: Picture of a T8 26 mm fluorescent lamp with indication for the location of the cold spot. Middle of the lamp length Good conditions for the luminous flux and lamp performance exist when the temperature at the cold spot is around 50 C at the lamp glass wall in the middle of the lamp. See Fig. 4. Only at this temperature a mercury vapour pressure is reached for an optimal UV generation. Maximum luminous flux is reached under these conditions as the lamp is designed for an ambient temperature of 25 C. For optimum operation and stabilisation, new lamps should be aged for 100 h at full output so that the surplus of dosed mercury can migrate to the cold spot in the lamp. Fig. 4: Graph relation between the cold spot temperature in a fluorescent lamp and the mercury vapour pressure in the discharge 60

62 Cold spot of a 16 mm T5 HE and HO fluorescent lamp 2) For more information consult: Taschenbuch der Lampentechnik OSRAM At an ambient temperature higher than 25 C, T8 26 mm fluorescent lamps show a decrease in luminous flux. Therefore T5 16 mm HE and HO fluorescent lamps were designed to reach their maximum luminous flux at about 35 C. This was possible by mounting one of the electrodes on a longer stem in such a way that it is put deeper inside the glass tube. Under this condition a cold chamber or cold spot is built behind one of the electrodes in the lamp. As consequence the optimum mercury vapour pressure reached at a cold spot temperature of 50 C will shift from 25 C ambient temperature to 35 C. See Fig % 90% 80% Luminous flux Phi in [%] 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% 0% Ambient temperature [ C] Phi HO54W [%] Phi L58W CCG [%] Phi L 58W ECG Fig. 5: Graph relation luminous flux T5 HO versus T8 in relation to the ambient temperature. IEC reference operation This cold chamber on all T5 16 mm HE, HE ES, HO, HO ES fluorescent lamps is located on the etch side (OSRAM lamp stamp end). See Fig. 6. This is the coolest location in the lamp were all excessive mercury will condensate. For optimum operation and stabilisation, new lamps should be aged for 100 h at full output so that the surplus of dosed mercury can migrate to the cold spot in the lamp. As the cold spot is located near the metal lamp cap, the best correlated location to measure cold spot temperature (relation luminous flux to the mercury vapour pressure) on the lamp glass is located 1 mm away from the changeover lamp cap material to the lamp glass. Cold spot location at 1 mm from cap rim Fig. 6: Picture T5 HO Lamp, etch side for cold spot location and its mount length 61

63 Cold spot of a T5 FC lamp Single capped fluorescent T5 FC lamps, have a maximum of luminous flux at an ambient temperature at about 30 C. The cold spot is located on the exhaust tube inside the lamp. Access is only possible when the cap 2Gx13 is removed. See Fig. 7 and Fig. 8. Cold spot location Fig. 7: Picture of a T5 FC lamp with open base so that cold spot location is visible Fig. 8: Close up of the cold spot location on the exhaust tube on a T5 FC OEM s can order engineering samples of T5 FC fluorescent lamps for cold spot temperature measurement with fixed thermocouple on the measuring point of the exhaust tube over OSRAM GmbH, QT QM&EHS CQM COC LP LPD department or their related sales contact. See 7.6 Reference lamps T5 HO CONSTANT lamps 6) For more information consult: Taschenbuch der Lampentechnik, OSRAM In contrast to standard double capped fluorescent T5 HO cold spot lamps, OSRAM T5 HO CONSTANT (amalgam lamps) were specially designed to achieve the optimum light output over a wide ambient temperature range. T5 HO CONSTANT technology enables the use of those fluorescent lamps in applications where very high or on the other hand very low lamp ambient temperatures prevail. OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO CONSTANT use amalgam and its special physical properties to control the mercury vapour pressure in the lamp. Amalgam is an alloy consisting of mercury and different metals such as Bi, In, Ag. The mercury vapour pressure (and consequently the luminous flux) is then controlled by the composition and the temperature of the amalgam. OSRAM T5 HO CONSTANT doesn t have a cold chamber construction like a standard OSRAM T5 HO fluorescent lamp. The amalgam is located on the mount of the electrode on the etch side of the lamp. T T Am Fig. 9: Vapour pressure Hg and Amalgam in relation to the cold spot and amalgam temperature. Amalgam generally needs a higher temperature itself, compared to the liquid mercury (Hg) in a cold spot controlled lamp. See Fig

64 This causes a certain delay (time shift) on the run-up behaviour. In order to shorten the run-up time of an OSRAM T5 HO CONSTANT fluorescent lamps, a second, so called run-up amalgam flag is installed in the close vicinity of both electrodes. The run-up amalgam is heated very quickly by the coil and releases a certain amount of mercury to the discharge, which speeds up the run-up of the OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO CONSTANT its luminous flux. The use of amalgam enables a significantly expanded temperature range with optimal mercury vapour pressure and consequently a lamp luminous flux above 90 % of the nominal. (See Fig. 10 below). 100 Principal behavior of lumen output at different ambient temperatures T12, T8, T5 HE/HO and T5 Constant (exception: HO 49W Constant) relative luminous flux [%] lamp ambient temperature [ C] T5 HO/HE T5 HO Constant T8 T12 T5 HO 49 Constant Fig. 10: Luminous flux for L58W, HO 54W, HO49W CONSTANT, HO 54W CONSTANT in relation to the ambient temperature. IEC reference operation 100 Principal behavior of lumen output at different ambient temperatures T5 HE/HO and T5 Constant and T5 HO 49W Constant 90 relative luminous flux [%] lamp ambient temperature [ C] T5 HO/HE T5 HO Constant T5 HO 49 Constant Fig. 11: Luminous flux T5 HO CONSTANT compared to T5 HO 24W, 39W, 54W 80W in relation to the ambient temperature. IEC reference operation 63

65 The high temperature amalgam is implemented in the OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO CONSTANT, which are suitable for the use in cold and hot ambient temperature environments, in conjunction with proper designed light fittings. See Fig

66 1.18 Which accessories are needed to operate single and double capped fluorescent lamps? Begin the seventies of last century, double capped fluorescent lamps T8 26 mm were originally developed to operate in light fittings with existing magnetic control gear and starters developed for T12 38 mm fluorescent lamps. Lamp operation at that time was standardised for magnetic operation at a mains frequency from 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Afterwards with the introduction of non-dimmable and dimmable electronic control gear in the mid eighties of last century T8 double capped fluorescent lamps were also used for High Frequency operation at operation frequencies >25 khz. Magnetic and electronic control gear should comply with the relevant IEC standards - safety and performance requirements, electromagnetic compatibility, immunity, harmonic currents - (see and 9.1.3) but also with the relevant European directives for RoHs as well as the directive 2009/125/EC in combination with the directive 245/2009. The label on the magnetic ballast informs the end user about the energy efficiency index for that kind of ballast. The European standard EN fixes the measuring methods for the total input power of the ballast-lamp system. Using this European standard as a basis, CELMA* (European Federation of the National Associations of the manufacturers of light fittings, control gears and lamp holders) has fixed both energy class and limit values for the ballast-lamp combination of most common fluorescent lamps. Originally the EEI system contained 7 classes: A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, C, D. Today this is reduced to 5 classes. Class D, phased out 21 st May 2002, class C, phased out 21 st November 2005, class B1 and B2 will be passed-out April With the European commission regulation 245/2009 from 18 th March 2009, implementing directive 2005/32/EC of the European parliament and the council with regards to ecodesign requirements for fluorescent lamps without integrated ballast, for high intensity discharge lamps, and for ballasts and light fittings able to operate such lamps, and repealing directive 2000/55/EC of the European parliament and of the council, a new document redefined the proper losses in magnetic and electronic control gear. This document is also called Energy related Products. Consult also Commission Regulation (EU) N 347/2010 of 21th April 2010 amending Commission Regulation (EC) 245/2009 as regards to ecodesign requirements for fluorescent lamps without integrated ballast, for high intensity discharge lamps, and for ballasts and light fittings able to operate such lamps For magnetic control gear, third stage will be activated eight years after this regulation come into force. This third step becomes effective on April, 13 th, 2017 for all low loss ballasts for FL and CFL, they must at least meet the A2 energy efficiency requirements. For more information about our program electronic ballasts dimmable and non dimmable please consult our website: 65

67 Magnetic ballasts (CCG or LLG) A ballast stabilize the current through an electrical load. Ballasts are most often used when an electrical circuit presents a negative resistance to the supply. If an electrical circuit like that is connected to a constant voltage power supply (mains voltage supply), it would draw an increasing amount of current until it is destroyed. To prevent this; a ballast is switched in series with the load, it provides a positive resistance or reactance that limits the lamp current to an appropriated level. Conventional control gear (CCG) is mend a magnetic standard ballast. LLG means a new generation of standard magnetic ballasts with lower losses. Additionally an external glow starter for lamp electrode preheating has to be used. OSRAM recommend replacing the LONGLIFE starter(s) in the light fitting or in the lamp circuit after each lamp replacement. Exception is made for all Starters ST171 SAFETY, ST172 SAFETY, ST173 SAFETY operated at an IEC 3 h switching cycle or higher. Those starters have to be replaced at the fourth lamp replacement. The major reason for this is to guarantee that the starter switch-on the lamp with optimised preheat time, ignition time and ignition voltage, so that lamp life reduction or too long ignition time are avoided. Magnetic ballasts (CCG or LLG) are constructed for a defined supply voltage and frequency, e.g. 230 V 50 Hz. The tolerance at that specified mains voltage is within a range of ± 10 % (for 230 V construction voltage 207 V up to 253 V, for 240 V construction voltage 216 V up to 264 V). If a magnetic ballast constructed for a mains voltage of 230 V is continuously operated at a mains voltage close to the upper voltage range then it can t be avoided that the lamp average and service life time will be reduced. Under those circumstances it is recommended to use ballasts built for a higher mains voltage range. 7) For more information consult: C.H. Sturm / E.Klein Betriebsgeräte für elektrische Lampen and Vorschaltgeräte 8) Sturm It is very important that the magnetic ballast (CCG or LLG) is tuned in function of the technical parameters (performance and safety) of the lamp or lamps. Complementary it must be released by the ballast manufacturer to operate this kind of combination. The expected life time of a conventional magnetic ballast is related to the maximum admitted winding temperature T W (T W 130 = 130 C). Theoretical expected life time of conventional magnetic ballast is in direct relation to this winding temperature, information about the expected life time of the conventional magnetic ballast operated under normal operation conditions is communicated by the ballast manufacturer in its product catalogue or on its website. 7) For more information consult: C.H. Sturm / E.Klein Betriebsgeräte für elektrische Lampen and 8) Sturm Vorschaltgeräte When this magnetic ballast is operated continuously under abnormal conditions, e.g. bimetal of the starter is short circuited, winding temperature T W 130 can be exceeded and a decrease in life time of the conventional magnetic ballast can t be avoided. In general it will start with an insulation failure at one defined point of the winding, provoking a short-circuit of the winding. The isolation at that local point is burned, the insulation failure continues to spread and destroy in a very short time the whole winding. The current which flow through the conventional magnetic ballast generates a power loss that leads to an increase in the winding temperature T W. The ΔT values for normal and abnormal operation provide an information of this temperature increase and has to be communicated on the Information label printed on the conventional magnetic ballast housing. e.g. ΔT = 45 K/110 K The first ΔT value gives an indication of the temperature increase for normal operation at the lamps operating current. The second value, 110 K in this case, denotes the temperature increase of the winding that results for the higher lamp current which flows when the lamp discharge path is short-circuited. The current which flows through the lamp electrodes in this state is the preheat current. 7) For more information consult: C.H. Sturm / E.Klein Betriebsgeräte für elektrische Lampen und Vorschaltgeräte 8) Sturm For further information related, we recommend you to consult the website from manufacturers from conventional magnetic control gear. Relevant international standard IEC or European standard EN Ballast for tubular fluorescent lamps, performance requirements. IEC or EN lamp control gear General and safety requirements. IEC or EN lamp control gear particular requirements for ballasts for fluorescent lamps. 66

68 Starters The function of starters is to preheat the electrodes of fluorescent lamp and generate an ignition pulse (0.9 kvs up to 1.3 kvs). While the lamp(s) is in operation the starter(s) should consume little or no power and be ready to operate again as soon as the fluorescent lamp(s) have been switched-off. St 111 LONGLIFE St 151 LONGLIFE DEOS St 171 Safety DEOS 173 Safety DEOS St 172 Safety Fig. 12: OSRAM Starters LONGLIFE and DEOS Safety A high-quality starter will last at least 60,000 on/of switching operations, such as OSRAM ST111 LONGLIFE and > 60,000 switches for a starter ST171 DEOS SAFETY and ST173 DEOS SAFETY. See Fig. 12. Starters for series operation type OSRAM ST151 LONGLIFE will last at least >18,000 switches, and > 20,000 switches for starter ST172 DEOS SAFETY. The DEOS SAFETY starters ST171, ST172, ST 173 also reliably switch-off failed fluorescent lamps at the end of their lives. Starter life time is defined in accordance to the lamp IEC switching cycle of 3 h (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off). Shorter operation time < 3 h IEC switching-cycle, between two switching cycles reduce the life time of the starter and the lamp. Starter and lamp combinations see attachment 1. OSRAM Starters LONGLIFE and DEOS SAFETY are designed to operate in an ambient temperature range from -20 C up to 80 C. For applications in a higher temperature range from -20 C up to 100 C a special starter type ST111 HT LONGLIFE has been designed. ST111 LONGLIFE, ST 111 HT LONGLIFE, ST171 DEOS SAFETY, ST173 DEOS SAFETY are designed for single operation ST151 LONGLIFE, ST 172 DEOS SAFETY are designed for series operation For further information about starters and their technical data sheet, please consult the latest edition of the starter technical guide available on our website under OSRAM recommends replacing the starter(s) in the light fitting or in the lamp circuit after each lamp replacement. Exception is made for all Starters ST171 DEOS SAFETY, ST172 DEOS SAFETY, ST173 DEOS SAFETY operated at an IEC 3 h switching cycle or higher. Those starters have to be replaced at the fourth lamp replacement. Shorter operation time < 3 h IEC switching-cycle, between two switching cycles reduce the life time of the starter (e.g. application in the cellar, garage kitchen with short operation time). Under those operation conditions it is recommended to replace the starter ST171 DEOS SAFETY, ST172 DEOS SAFETY, ST173 DEOS SAFETY together with the failed lamp. All relevant starter parameters for safety and performance are defined in the international standard IEC or European standard EN Glow starter for fluorescent lamps fourth edition , amendment , amendment

69 Capacitors for power factor compensation As power factor is designated - in electrical engineering in accordance to DIN the quotient from the value of active power to apparent power. Power factor = λ = ε. cos ϕ Exclusively for sinusoidal current and voltage the active factor is defined out of the quotient P/S. It isn t equal to the cosine of the phase difference angle ϕ For sinusoidal waveform, power is given by the equation P = U x I x cos ϕ, where cos ϕ is the power factor. To guarantee that lighting circuits do not disturb the mains voltage supply, a power factor close to 1 is required. Under those circumstances rms value of the current drawn from the mains supply is in phase with the rms value of the supply voltage. For larger lighting circuits a power factor > 0.9 is specified for full load. The power factor of an inductive magnetic ballast is low (cos ϕ 0.5) and need to be compensated with series or parallel capacitors. In the case of compensating the cos ϕ with series capacitors, see Fig. 13 and Fig. 14, which is requested in some countries, it must be know that the characteristics and tolerances from this series compensation circuit causes a higher lamp current, lamp wattage and therefore more power losses in the magnetic ballast. The system wattage of magnetic ballasts in series with the power factor correction capacitor may not meet anymore the limits according the Energy Efficiency Index printed on the ballast. Compensation of one lamp circuit with a series compensation capacitor in a lead lag circuit (2 lamp light fitting, one lamp circuit inductive, the second lamp circuit series capacitive compensated) excludes also stroboscopic effects. If a frequency with a succession of time intervals - that succeed each other - in a period of at least 16 Hz, then the observed phases of the process conflates to an apparently uninterrupted action because of the flicker fusion rate respectively the inertia of the human eye. This effect, when lighting is flickering, is dangerous and must be avoided at working stations with rotating machinery. This is generally the case for fluorescent lamps and other discharge lamps operated with conventional magnetic ballasts. The luminous flux is swinging with the double rhythm of the a.c. mains voltage frequency (also 100/120 Hz accordingly the mains frequency of 50/60 Hz). This can lead to the fact that the rotation or the rotational direction rotating parts is evaluated incorrectly (stroboscopic effect). On the basis of this experience and the associated risk of accident hazard it is required to use flicker free light systems (e.g. fluorescent lamps in combination with ECG). Inductive side Capacitive side Fig. 13: Light fitting 2 x L18W lead lag, inductive side: mains voltage U line, lamp arc voltage U lamp, lamp current I lamp, capacitive side: mains voltage U line, Ballast voltage U ballast, capacitor voltage (series capacitor) U capacitor, Equipment voltage U ballast +U capacitor ) lamp current I lamp in the capacitive lead from a lead lag circuitry 68

70 Fig. 14: Light fitting 2 x L18W lead lag; lamp arc voltage inductive U lamp, lamp current inductive I lamp, lamp arc voltage capacitive U lamp, lamp current capacitive I lamp Fig. 15: Light fitting 2 x L18W lead lag; mains voltage U line, lamp voltage capacitive U lamp, lamp current capacitive I lamp Power factor correction capacitors connected in parallel to the mains voltage do not have any impact on the losses in the magnetic ballast. See Fig. 16, Fig. 17, Fig. 18, and Fig. 19. Fig. 16: light fitting 1 x L18W inductive mode, mains voltage U line,, mains current I line, lamp arc voltage U lamp, lamp current I lamp Fig. 17: light fitting 1 x L18W inductive mode, mains voltage U line,, mains current I line, lamp arc voltage U lamp, ballast voltage U ballast Fig. 18: light fitting 1 x L18W parallel compensated, mains voltage U line,, mains current I line, lamp arc voltage U lamp, lamp current I lamp Fig. 19: light fitting 1 x L18W parallel compensated, mains voltage U line,, mains current I line, lamp arc voltage U lamp, ballast voltage U ballast 69

71 The parallel suitable capacitor connected to the mains supply voltage, takes a current which is leading in phase and this partly cancel the lagging current taken by the lamp circuit. Lamp Wattage in (W) Lamp diameter in (mm) Parallel compensation 1) capacitor, power factor 1 in (µf) 250 V mains voltage / / / / / ) / /450 1) For parallel compensation see single circuit 2) For lead lag circuit, see 3.2 Fig. 45 3) In operation with a 40/36W CCG or LLG Series compensation capacitor for lead lag 2) circuit in (µf/vc) T5 16 mm HE or HO as well as T5 16 mm FC are not standardised or released for operation with magnetic ballast and additionally starting device. For this reason, this mode of operation (all T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO ES, HO CONSTANT, HO XT in combination with a CCG or LLG (all kind of magnetic ballasts and starters) is not recommended and supported by OSRAM. In accordance with the ballast directive 2000/55/EG, first stage requirements, it isn t allowed any more from 2002, May 21 st on, that particular power limits for lamp-ballast-circuits are exceeded. This directive shall apply to electric mains-operated ballast for fluorescent lamps as defined in the EN edition December 1998, paragraph 3.4 which defines a measurement method of total input power of lampballast circuits. The ballast may consist of one or more separate components. It may also include means for transforming the supply voltage and arrangements which help provide the starting voltage, preheating current, prevent cold starting, reduce stroboscopic effect, correct the power factor and for suppress radio interference. The system power for lamps and ballasts in capacitive mode for light fittings with series capacitors - are increased up to 14 % compared to pure inductive mode. The result informs that this increased system power even when low loss ballasts are used in combination with series capacitors exceed the particular system power limits defined under the first stage requirements from the directive 2000/55/EG. For this reason ZVEI (Zentralverband Elektrotechnik- und Elektronikindustrie e.v.) recommend from 2002, May 21st on, that light fitting with series capacitors are not sold in the market. In this connection it should be refered to the advantages offered by light fittings with parallel capacitors respectively ECG operation. Source: ZVEI, EN 50294, directive 2000/55/EG. 70

72 Electronic control gear (ECG) The first electronic control gear OSRAM QUICKTRONIC (ECG) 7) For more information consult C.H Sturm / E. Klein Betriebsgeräte and Schaltungen für elektrische Lampen were introduced in the market begin the eighties of last century. Compared with today s electronic gear there has been great innovation steps set in the development field from those ECG so that the number of electronic components could be reduced to an absolute minimum. This was realised with the miniaturisation of electronic circuitry (IC s and Microprocessors ASIC for standard ECG and µcontrolled processors for professional products), SMD components (surface mounted device) and component assembly on both sides of the PCB. For a good life time OSRAM QUICKTRONIC ECG preheated is preferred to operate single and double capped fluorescent lamps. Instant start ECG s have the disadvantage that at each switch-on of the lamp the cold electrodes are fed with maximum energy, so that tungsten material and emitter is sputtered in the gas discharge tube. If more than two switches a day are realised with this kind of ECG type to switch-on fluorescent lamps, lamp life time will be reduced with a factor greater than 60 %. The advantage to operate fluorescent lamps with a high frequency lamp current higher 25 khz leads to an explicit improvement of the lamp efficiency factor. If the luminous flux is kept constant compared with CCG operation - then that will have as a result a decrease of the electrical system power by 8 up to 10 %. For more information consult: Technical guide: QUICKTRONIC - Electronic control gear for fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps. September Technical guide line: ECG for T5 fluorescent lamps Electronic control gear to operate T5 16mm fluorescent lamps may 2005 Technical guide: QUICKTRONIC DALI/DIM - Dimmable electronic control gear for fluorescent lamps.- June 2009 Double capped fluorescent lamps 26 mm T8 diameter can also operate with electronic control gear as long as their performance is standardised in the international standard IEC OSRAM QUICKTRONIC ECG for non dimmable operation of T8 and T5 fluorescent lamps such as QT-FIT8, QTP8, QTP5, QTP-DL, QTP-M are a state of the art in ECG manufacturing in which latest developments for Best Available Technology are available. One of their major advantage is that all of them are preheated ECGs. The properties of a high quality ECG can be condensed in two words; quality and reliability. For more information consult the QUICKTRONIC technical guide at For safety reasons, the preheated electronic ballast for T5 HO, HE and T5 FC fluorescent lamps must be executed with an end of life detection as described in the relevant standard IEC chapter 17 behaviour of the ballast at end of lamp life. At the end of lamp life the electronic ballast shall behave in such a way that no overheating of lamp caps occurs at any voltage between 90 % and 110 % of the rated supply voltage. For the test simulating end of lamp life effects, three tests are described in the standard IEC : asymmetric pulse test asymmetric power dissipation test open filament test Any of these three tests may be used to qualify electronic ballasts. The ballast manufacturer shall determine which of the three tests will be used to test a given ballast based on the design of that particular ballast circuit. The preferred OSRAM end of life test is the asymmetric power dissipation test for all its electronic control gear. 71

73 Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 16 mm HE and HO as well as single capped fluorescent lamps T5 16 mm FC are designed to operate only with preheated electronic control gear OSRAM QUICKTRONIC. Under this mode of operation their parameters have been standardised in the relevant standard IEC or EN for double capped fluorescent lamps (performance specifications) and IEC or EN for single capped fluorescent lamps (performance specifications). There is no standardisation in the IEC 60081, performance requirements - for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE and HO as well as in the IEC 60901, performance requirements - single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC for an operation on a conventional magnetic control gear or for instant start operation. This operation mode isn t supported by OSRAM. Product features of OSRAM QUICKTRONIC ECG for T5 HE, HO 16 mm and T5 FC 16 mm lamps. OSRAM QUICKTRONIC ECG offers different advantages (comfort, safety, economy) for the customer. AC voltage range, 198 V up to 264 V for QTi II, QTP5 DC voltage range, 176 V up to 276 V 1) for QTi II, QTP5 Flicker free preheated start Constant lamp luminous flux in AC and DC voltage range Steady light with no stroboscopic effects Silent operation with no distracting ballast hum Cut-Off technology, cut-off the permanent preheating of the electrode coil after lamp ignition No flashing of defective or end of life lamps Automatic restart after lamp change High lumen output for a T5 HO system Very high luminous efficacy for a T5 HE system Long lamp life realised with optimum electrode coil preheating and operation with cut-off technology Low maintenance costs EoL 2) : Switch-off the power supply of the lamp(s) when the ECG is operated with failed lamp(s) Compliance with the relevant European and international standards for safety, performance and EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) Protection against short duration voltage surges and transient over voltages Voltages below 198 V are only permitted for temporary emergency operation, not for permanent operation EoL = End of Life detection in accordance to the European standard EN (and International standard IEC ) Further information about T5 16 mm HE and HO as well as T5 16 mm FC is available in the technical guide ECG for T5 fluorescent lamps on our website The latest hit to realise energy savings in buildings, workings stations, stairways, corridors is a combination of a double capped fluorescent lamp and LED light source controlled in one ECG. QUICKTRONIC Intelligent Dual Power GII, combines the advantage of both light sources controlled over a motion detector. General illumination will be realised with a T5 HE lamp and provide the necessary illumination level that is requested in the application. The motion detector will switch-off the T5 HE lamp when no human presence is detected on the location and switch-on the LED light source so that a safety light level is available. As soon as somebody enters the room, the stairway or corridor; the motion detector detects the presence and activate the entry on the ECG for the T5 HE lamp so that the ground illumination level is guaranteed. 72

74 Electronic control gear for dimmable operation Intelligent and building automation systems are very important in sophisticated modern constructions. Monitoring and automatic control of the building is essential when it comes to reduce the worldwide emission of CO 2 in the atmosphere. Artificial lighting is fundamental for visualisation of the environment and the spaces in which we are living, working when there is no sufficient natural daylight available. Lighting systems are one of the major energy consumers in buildings. Quality of visual environment, quality of life and energy efficiency of lighting are in function of the lamp/system selection and the light fitting. Words like daylight harvesting, motion detection, dynamic light and economical light are most usual nowadays to let end-users understand that it is possible to realise important energy savings. Those energy savings can also be realised by switching off the lighting when no human presence is detected on the work place, stairways or in large corridors. For safety reasons, it is also accepted to adapt in some areas the lighting level to the needs of the moment so that it can be adapted over a dimming level and reduce to an absolute minimum (3 % up to 10 % luminous flux) so that safety for end-user is guaranteed. Dimming of fluorescent lamps with a dimmable ECG can be realised over a DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface) or a 1-10 V Interface (e.g. DMX). Single capped fluorescent lamps T5 16 mm FC and double capped fluorescent lamps T8 26 mm, T5 16 mm FH and HO are dimmable with dimmable QUICKTRONIC ECG. For more information about dimmable OSRAM QUICKTRONIC QUICKTRONIC DALI/DIM see our website ECG consult our technical guide OSRAM 73

75 2 Lamp data 2.1 Geometric data Geometry of double capped fluorescent lamps T8 and T5 are standardised in the international standard IEC or European standard EN 60081, single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC are standardised in the international standard IEC or European standard EN In the standard IEC or EN geometric data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape with G5 and G13 caps is included, their values for dimensions A, B and C are derived from a basic value, designated X. G5 cap see data sheet of IEC G13 cap see data sheet of IEC A = cap to cap face = value l 1 in OSRAM catalogue A max = X B = cap face to end of opposite pins = value l 2 in OSRAM catalogue B max = X mm B min = X mm (B max = X mm in some countries) C = overall length of the lamp between pin ends = value l 3 in OSRAM catalogue C max = X + (2 x 7.1) = X mm C min = is not specified. The dimensions given on the lamp data sheets comply with the above system Note: In some instances, the dimensions in national specifications differ slightly from those in the data sheets. Because these specifications are well established, it isn t intended that they should be changed. The dimensions in the data sheets are quoted as a desirable objective. 74

76 2.1.1 Geometric data double capped fluorescent linear shape T8 lamps Wattage cap l 1 = A max (mm) l 2 = B l 3 = C max (mm) (W) (mm) 10 G ± G ± G ± ES G ± G ± G ± G ± ES G ± G ± G ± G ± ES G ± G ± G ± Sheet IEC for T8 L 15 W Sheet IEC for T8 L 18 W Sheet IEC for T8 L 30 W Sheet IEC for T8 L 36 W Sheet IEC for T8 L 38 W Sheet IEC for T8 L 58 W Sheet IEC for T8 L 70 W Diameter IEC max (mm) 75

77 2.1.2 Geometric data double capped fluorescent linear shape T5 HE, HE ES, HO and HO CONSTANT lamps Wattage cap l 1 = A max (mm) l 2 = B l 3 = C max (mm) (W) (mm) 14 HE G ± HE G ± HO G ± HE ES G ± HE G ± HE ES G ± HE G ± HO G ± HO ES G ± HO G ± HO ES G ± HO G ± HO ES G ± HO G ± Diameter max (mm) IEC Sheet IEC for T5 HE 14 W Sheet IEC for T5 HE 21 W Sheet IEC for T5 HE 28 W Sheet IEC for T5 HE 35 W Sheet IEC for T5 HO 24 W Sheet IEC for T5 HO 39 W Sheet IEC for T5 HO 49 W Sheet IEC for T5 HO 54 W Sheet IEC for T5 HO 80 W 76

78 2.1.3 Geometric data double capped fluorescent linear shape T5 HE SEAMLESS lamps Wattage (W) cap A min (mm) B min (mm) B max (mm) C min (mm) D max (mm) E max (mm) F ± 0.7 (mm) G ± 0.1 (mm) Overall length 14 HE SLS G HE SLS G HE SLS G Geometric data double capped fluorescent linear shape T5 HO SEAMLESS lamps Wattage A min B min B max C min D max E max F ± 1.5 G ± 0.5 Overall cap (W) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) length 24 HO SLS G HO SLS G HO SLS G

79 In the standard IEC or EN geometric data for single capped fluorescent lamps, circular shape is included. See diagrammatic data sheet IEC-04 circular-shaped lamps. Cap 2GX13 see data sheet of IEC D = diameter outer glass circle = value d 1 in OSRAM catalogue d 1 max = maximum outer lamp diameter B = diameter inner glass circle = value d 2 in OSRAM catalogue d 2 max = maximum inner lamp diameter D 1 = bulb diameter = value d in OSRAM catalogue d = bulb diameter Geometric data single capped fluorescent circular shape T5 FC lamps Wattage (W) cap d 1 = D (mm) d 2 = B (mm) d 3 = D 1 (mm) FC 22 2GX ± ± 5 16 FC 40 2GX ± ± 6 16 FC 55 2GX ± ± 6 16 Sheet IEC for T5 FC 22 W Sheet IEC for T5 FC 40 W Sheet IEC for T5 FC 55 W 78

80 2.1.6 Geometric data double capped fluorescent linear shape T5 Short lamps G5 cap see data sheet of IEC A = cap to cap face = value l 1 in OSRAM catalogue A max = X B = cap face to end of opposite pins = value l 2 in OSRAM catalogue B max = X mm B min = X mm (B max = X mm in some countries) C = overall length of the lamp between pin ends = value l 3 in OSRAM catalogue C max = X + (2 x 7.1) = X mm C min = is not specified. The dimensions given on the lamp data sheets comply with the above system. Note: In some instances, the dimensions in national specifications differ slightly from those in the data sheets. Because these specifications are well established, it isn t intended that they should be changed. The dimensions in the data sheets are quoted as a desirable objective. Wattage cap l 1 = A max (mm) l 2 = B l 3 = C max (mm) (W) (mm) 4 G ± ) G ± ) G ± G ± ) Also T5 EL Short, emergency lighting lamps Sheet IEC-1020 preheated Sheet IEC-1030 preheated Sheet IEC-1040 preheated Sheet IEC-1060 preheated Diameter IEC max (mm) 79

81 2.2 Operation modes and electrical data OSRAM T8 double capped fluorescent linear lamps are suitable for magnetic (CCG) and electronic (ECG) operation. T5 HE and HO lamps as well as T5 FC lamps are approved exclusively for ECG operation. Single lamp and twin lamp operation are the most common arrangements for ECG operation. It is also possible to operate 3 or 4 T5 or T8 low wattage fluorescent lamps with a specially designed T5 or T8 ECG QUICKTRONIC. The following table shows the data for reference lamps: Measurement conditions according to IEC or EN and IEC or EN 60901: Operation on reference gear, unless otherwise specified on the relevant lamp data sheet Test circuit HF operation: see Fig A.4 for lamps with preheated cathode in IEC or EN and IEC 60901or EN Operation frequency: 20 khz 26 khz, see IEC or EN and IEC or EN60901 Ballast: the non-inductive ballast resistor shall be so adjusted that the HF lamp current is equal to the value as specified on the relevant data sheet Starting aid: a metal plate shall be connected to earth potential together with one lamp cathode. Its length shall be not less than that of the lamp under test, and it shall be 25 mm wide for 16 mm T5 diameter lamps, and 40 mm wide for 26 mm T8 diameter lamps. The distance between the surface of the lamp and the starting aid shall be as specified on the relevant lamp data sheet Test voltage and current Ambient temperature 25 C (between 20 C and 27 C) for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape and single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape Relative humidity of 65 % maximum T8 double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape should be aged 100 h in horizontal operation position, IEC switching cycle 3h (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) T5 HE and HO double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape are aged 100 h in vertical operation position, etch facing the floor, IEC switching cycle 3 h (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) Single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape T5 FC are aged 100 h in horizontal operation position, IEC switching cycle 3 h (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) Photometric characteristics: The initial reading of the luminous flux of a lamp shall be not less than: 90 % of the rated value for single capped fluorescent lamps in accordance to the IEC or EN % of the rated value for double capped fluorescent lamps, in accordance to the IEC or EN Measurements shall be made after a sufficient period of stabilisation of the 100 h aged lamp. An appropriated stabilisation is 15 minutes for T8 lamps and minimum 30 minutes for T5 HE and HO lamps. 80

82 2.2.1 Electronic operation double capped fluorescent lamps T8 range Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T8 range, 26 mm diameter, HF operation. Photometric and electric values under consideration (UC), procedure for standardisation are started in the standardisation workgroup. Lamp reference Rated luminous flux lm 1) Rated lamp power W Luminous efficacy Rated arc voltage lm/w V rms L 10 W 2) L 15 W 2) L 16 W 2) L 18 W 2) L 23 W 2) L 30 W 2) L 36 W 2) L 36 W/ -1 2) L 38 W 2) L 58 W 2) L 70 W 2) L 18 W 2) XT L 36 W 2) XT L 58 W 2) XT L 18 W 2) XXT L 36 W 2) XXT L 58 W 2) XXT L 16 W 2) ES L 32 W 2) ES L 51 W 2) ES ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C, on reference control gear) 2) For light colours: LUMILUX 827, 830, 835, 840 UC = under consideration Rated lamp current ma rms Electronic operation double capped fluorescent lamps T5 range Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE range, 16 mm diameter, HF operation: Lamp reference Rated Rated Luminous Rated Rated lamp luminous flux 1) lm lamp power W efficacy lm/w arc voltage V rms current ma rms HE 14 W ) HE 21 W ) HE 28 W ) HE 35 W ) HE 13 W ES UC UC UC UC UC HE 19 W ES UC UC UC UC UC HE 25 W ES ) HE 32 W ES ) ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C, on reference control gear) 2) For light colours: LUMILUX 827, 830, 835, 840 UC = under consideration 81

83 Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HO range, 16 mm diameter, HF operation: Rated Rated Luminous Rated Rated Lamp reference luminous lamp efficacy arc lamp flux 1) power voltage current lm W lm/w V rms ma rms HO 24 W ) HO 39 W ) HO 49 W ) HO 54 W ) HO 80 W ) HO 45 W ES UC 44.4 UC HO 50 W ES UC 48.5 UC HO 73 W ES UC 73.2 UC HO 49 W XT ) HO 54 W XT ) HO 80 W XT ) HO 24 W CONSTANT ) HO 39 W CONSTANT ) HO 49 W CONSTANT ) HO 54 W CONSTANT ) HO 80 W CONSTANT ) ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C, reference control gear) 2) For light colours: LUMILUX 827, 830, 835, 840 UC = under consideration Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE and HO SEAMLESS range, 16 mm diameter, HF operation: Lamp reference Rated luminous flux 1) lm Rated lamp power W Luminous efficacy Rated arc voltage Rated lamp current ma rms lm/w V rms HE 14 W SLS ) HE 21 W SLS ) HE 28 W SLS ) HO 24 W SLS ) HO 39 W SLS ) HO 54 W SLS ) ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C and reference control gear) 2) For light colours: 827, 830, 835, Electronic operation single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC Data for single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape T5 FC range, 16 mm diameter, HF operation: Lamp reference Rated luminous flux 1) lm Rated lamp power W Luminous efficacy lm/w Rated arc voltage V rms Rated lamp current ma rms FC 22 W ) FC 40 W ) FC 55 W ) ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C and reference control gear) 2) For light colours: 827, 830, 835,

84 2.2.4 Electronic operation double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short range Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 Short BASIC, LUMILUX, LUMILUX de LUXE range 16 mm diameter, HF operation: Lamp reference Rated luminous flux 1) lm Rated lamp power W Luminous efficacy lm/w Rated arc voltage V rms Rated lamp current ma rms L 4 W 2) L 6 W L 8 W L 13 W ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C) 2) Only in BASIC available Electronic operation double capped fluorescent lamps T5 EL Short, Emergency lighting range T5 EL Short are special lamps for emergency lighting applications. Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 Short EL BASIC, LUMILUX, Emergency Lighting range 16 mm diameter, HF operation: Lamp reference Rated luminous flux 1) lm Rated lamp power W Luminous efficacy lm/w Rated arc voltage V rms Rated lamp current ma rms L 6 W L 8 W ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C) Inductive operation single - lamp circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps T8 range T5 16 mm, HE, HE ES, HE SLS, HO, HO ES, HO CONSTANT, HO XT, HO SLS are not released for operation with classic control gear (CCG, magnetic ballast and starter). For safety reasons this kind of electrical operation isn t supported by OSRAM. Measurement conditions according to IEC or EN 60081: Operation on reference gear, unless otherwise specified on the relevant lamp data sheet. See IEC or EN Test circuit: see Fig A.1 for lamps with preheated cathode, IEC or EN Operation frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz, see IEC or EN Ballast, the ballast shall be of the inductive type, unless specified on the relevant data sheet and shall comply with the requirements of IEC or EN It shall be rated as specified on the relevant lamp data sheet. Where a capacitive circuit is specified, additionally the capacitor used shall comply with the requirements of IEC or EN For more information see IEC 60081or EN A.2.2 Starter: The types of glow starter to be used comply with the requirements of IEC or EN 60155, and shall in any case to be subject to agreement with the lamp manufacturer Ambient temperature 25 C (between 20 C and 27 C) for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape and single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape Relative humidity of 65 % maximum T8 double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape should be aged 100 h in horizontal operation position, IEC switching cycle 3 h (165 minutes on, 15 minutes off) Photometric characteristics: The initial reading of the luminous flux of a lamp shall be not less than: 92 % of the rated value for double capped fluorescent lamps, see IEC 60081or EN

85 Measurements shall be made after a sufficient period of stabilisation of the 100 h aged lamp. An appropriated stabilisation is 15 minutes for T8 lamps. Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 diameter 50 Hz operation: Lamp reference Nominal luminous flux 1) lm Rated lamp power W Luminous efficacy lm/w Rated arc voltage Lamp current ma Calibration current ma Impedance Ω V rms Power factor L 10 W 2)6) L 15 W 2)6)8) L 15 W 4)6)8) L 16 W 2)6)8) L 18 W 2)6)7) L 18 W 4)6)7) L 18 W 5)6)7) L 23 W 2)6) L 30 W 2)6)8) L 30 W 4)6)8) L 30 W 5)6)8) L 36 W 2)6)7) L 36 W 4)6)7) L 36 W 5)6)7) L 36 W/ -1 2)6)7) L 38 W 2)6)7) L 38 W 5)6)7) L 58 W 2)6)7) ,10 L 58 W 4)6)7) ,10 L 58 W 5)6)7) ,10 L 70 W 2) L 18 W 2)6)8) XT L 18 W 4)6)8) XT L 36 W 2)6)7) XT L 36 W 4)6)7) XT L 58 W 2)6)7) XT ,10 L 58 W 4)6)7) XT ,10 L 18 W 2)6)8) XXT L 18 W 4)6)8) XXT L 36 W 2)6)7) XXT L 36 W 4)6)7) XXT L 58 W 2)6)7) XXT ,10 L 58 W 4)6)7) XXT ,10 L 16 W 2)6)8) ES L 32 W 2)6)7) ES L 51 W 2)6)7) ES ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C, operation with reference control gear) 2) For light colours: 827, 830, 835, 840 3) For light colour: 850 4) For light colour: 865 5) For light colour: 880 6) Starter ST111 LONGLIFE 7) Starter ST171 SAFETY 8) Starter ST173 SAFETY 84

86 2.2.7 Inductive operation single - lamp circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short range V rms Power factor L 4 W 2)4) L 6 W 2)4) L 8 W 2)4) L 8 W 3)4) L 13 W 2)4) L 13 W 3)4) ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C, operation with reference control gear) 2) Light colour: 640 3) Light colour: 765 4) Starter ST111 LONGLIFE V rms Power factor L 6 W 3)5) L 8 W 2)3)4)5) L 13 W 2)3)4)5) ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C, operation with reference control gear) 2) Light colour: 827 3) Light colour: 830 4) Light colour: 840 5) Starter ST111 LONGLIFE 1) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C, operation with reference control gear) 2) Light colour: 930 3) Light colour: 954 4) Starter ST111 LONGLIFE Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 16 mm T5 Short BASIC, 50 Hz operation: Lamp reference Nominal luminous flux 1) lm Rated lamp power W Luminous efficacy lm/w Rated arc voltage Lamp current ma Calibration current ma Impedance Ω Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 16 mm T5 Short LUMILUX, 50 Hz operation: Lamp reference Nominal luminous flux 1) lm Rated lamp power W Luminous efficacy lm/w Rated arc voltage Lamp current ma Calibration current ma Impedance Ω Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 16 mm T5 Short LUMILUX de LUXE, 50 Hz operation: Lamp reference Nominal luminous Rated lamp Luminous efficacy Rated arc Lamp current Calibration current Impedance Power factor flux 1) lm power W lm/w voltage V rms ma ma Ω L 6 W 2) L 8 W 2)3)4) L 13 W 2)3)4) Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 16 mm T5 EL Short BASIC, 50 Hz operation: Lamp reference Nominal luminous flux 1) lm Rated lamp power W Luminous efficacy lm/w Rated arc voltage Lamp current ma Calibration current ma Impedance Ω V rms Power factor L 6 W 2) L 8 W 2)3) ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C, operation with reference control gear) 2) Light colour: 640 3) Starter ST111 LONGLIFE 85

87 Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 16 mm T5 EL Short LUMILUX, 50 Hz operation: Lamp reference Nominal Rated Luminous Rated Lamp Calibration Impedance Power luminous lamp efficacy arc current current factor flux 1) power voltage lm W lm/w V rms ma ma Ω L 6 W 2) L 8 W 2)3) ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C, operation with reference control gear) 2) Light colour: 840 3) Starter ST111 LONGLIFE Inductive operation series circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps T8 range T5 HE, HE ES, HE SLS, HO, HO ES, HO CONSTANT, HO XT, HO SLS are not released for operation with classic control gear (CCG, magnetic ballast and starter). For safety reasons this kind of electrical operation isn t supported by OSRAM. Series circuits (twin series lamps) are possible only for certain types of lamps in which the arc voltage does not exceed a certain value. The operation of double capped fluorescent lamps 26 mm T8 is stabilised over an inductive ballast, whereat the arc voltage of the lamps is half of the mains voltage. Short fluorescent lamps with a length up to 600 mm or 2 feet and a lamp power of 18 W have an arc voltage of 60 V. In this case it is theoretically possible to operate 2 fluorescent lamps with 18 W lamp power in a twin series circuit in combination with one 36/40 W ballast (230 V AC 50 Hz) at a mains supply voltage of 230 V AC 50 Hz if this combination is released by the ballast manufacturer. The table below gives an overview which lamp power is suited for operation in a twin series circuit. Measurement conditions: 230 V / 50 Hz supply voltage Operation on reference gear Ambient temperature 25 C Relative humidity of 65 % maximum Lamps aged 100 hours Horizontal operation position Lamp reference Ballast CCG 2) 2 x L 15 W 30 W 2 x L 18 W 36/40 W Starter OSRAM Arc voltage 1) V 1) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C and reference control gear) 2) If released by the ballast manufacturer Lamp current 1) ma Calibration current ma Ω ST151 or 55 ST ST151 or 57 ST Impedance 86

88 2.2.9 Inductive operation series circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps 16 mm T5 Short range Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 16 mm T5 Short BASIC, LUMILUX, LUMILUX de LUXE, 50 Hz operation: Lamp reference Ballast CCG 2) Starter OSRAM Arc voltage 1) V Lamp current 1) ma Calibration current ma Impedance Ω 2 x L 4 W 8 W ST x L 6 W 8 W ST x L 8 W 13 W ST ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C and reference control gear) 2) If released by ballast manufacturer Data for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 16 mm T5 EL Short BASIC, LUMILUX, Emergency Lighting 50 Hz operation: Lamp reference Ballast CCG 2) Starter OSRAM Arc voltage 1) V Lamp current 2) ma Calibration current ma Impedance Ω 2 x L 6 W 8 W ST x L 8 W 13 W ST ) 100 h measurement (initial value at 25 C and reference control gear) 2) If released by the ballast manufacturer Inductive operation lead lag circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps T8 range T5 HE, HE ES, HE SLS, HO, HO ES, HO CONSTANT, HO XT, HO SLS are not released for operation with classic control gear (CCG, magnetic ballast and starter). For safety reasons this kind of electrical operation isn t supported by OSRAM. With certain lamps in two-lamp inductive arrangements, a lead-lag circuit can be set up in which one of the two CCGs is combined with a series capacitor. For the capacitor data see and electric circuit see Fig. 45. Circuit diagram available at: 87

89 2.3 Photometric data Light colours The light colour of a light source can be represented with the chromaticity coordinates x and y in the Standard chromaticity diagram (CIE 15-2 / CIE-1931, See Fig. 20). For each lamp type target values x and y for the chromaticity coordinates are specified for a given light colour (as example for the light colour 840 of fluorescent lamps x/y 0,380/0,380). 11) For more information consult CIE 13.3 Fig. 20: Chromaticity diagram CIE 1931 To determine deviations from these target coordinates detailed investigations about human colour vision has been realised. Based on that results elliptic areas of standard deviation of colour matching (SDCM) were defined, which represents only just visible difference in light colour in a test setup. These minimal visible chromaticity differences are depicted in the so-called MacAdam ellipses, also mentioned as SDCM-ellipses (see Fig. 21). MacAdam ellipse was created as perception of colour differences is dependent on colour coordinates and unequal in x and y direction. The distance from the centre to the edge corresponds to the smallest perceptible colour difference from the eye between two colours. It is also the definition for colour tolerance and colour spread. The target colour coordinates for double capped fluorescent lamps is defined in the international standard IEC or European standard EN

90 In the related lamp standardization often the maximum disparity of the colour chromaticity form the target chromaticity is mentioned. It is set at 5 SDCM (Standard Deviation of Colour Matching), maximum allowed standard deviation. Often colour deviation is issued in complains from our customers, especially when indirect illumination is realised in rooms, offices and corridors. In hotels mostly colour deviation appears on the ceiling of the room when illumination is realised in a vault or a concrete haunch. As our eye is our best perception instrument, it recognises small differences in the light colour between several lamps as a colour temperature difference. In most of all cases this isn t a difference in colour temperature but issued by a luminance or brightness difference. In such cases it is recommended to have a check-up of the installation what really is the origin of the issue: Is there a mix of several lamp wattages or only one? Manufacturing batch, only one or a mix? Do all lamps have the same operation time? Are all installed light fittings identical Are all ECG, CCG identical? No mix between dimmable and not dimmable Especially for T5 fluorescent lamps are the cold spots (lamp etch side) at a similar temperature (Etches facing each other)? Are all lamps spaced with their cold spot at the same distance? Is the lamp environment a draught frees ambient, no air stream produced by an air conditioning device which is blowing cold air or circulating air in the vault on or along the lamp? Are any live parts of the light fitting touching the lamp glass? Are all reflectors made out of the same material, are there reflection or iridising difference effects? "Colour" T c x y F ,313 0,337 F ,346 0,359 F ,380 0,380 F ,409 0,394 F ,440 0,403 F ,463 0,420 0,390 0,385 0,380 0,375 0,370 Fig. 21: Correlated colour temperature, chromaticity, colour spread and MacAdam ellipses 5-step MacAdam Ellipse 0,365 0,365 0,370 0,375 0,380 0,385 0,390 Tables with chromaticity coordinates below are valid for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T8 at 25 C ambient temperature. 89

91 Chromaticity for LUMILUX light colours at 25 C 1) ambient temperature: Light colour/ Chromaticity x y Chromaticity for LUMILUX DE LUXE light colours at 25 C 1) ambient temperature: Light colour/ Chromaticity Biolux x ,342 y ,348 Chromaticity for special light colours at 25 C 1) ambient temperature: Light colour/ Chromaticity Chip control LUMILUX Red 66 Green 67 Blue 76 Natura 77 Fluora x y ) Changes respectively variations for other lamp types and ambient temperature are possible (e.g. double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE or HO and single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape T5 FC) Correlated colour temperature is defined in unit of Kelvin [K], which derives from the emission spectrum of an ideal black body in accordance to Planck (see Fig. 22: Chromaticity diagram CIE, Planck and Judd lines included). 90

92 Fig. 22: Chromaticity diagram CIE, Planck and Judd lines included In Fig. 22 are also shown Judd Lines. If the chromaticity of a light source is different to the Planck Curve, they show the most related colour temperature referring the human eye. Basics to colour rendering index / CRI: The colour rendering index CRI is derived from a comparison of sample colours with colour rendering properties of a reference light source (described in DIN 6169). A R a -value of 100 means a perfect repeating of all sample colours. The commonly used CRI is based on 8 reference colours and is called R a 8. See Fig. 23. The lower this value appears, the more inaccurate is the rendering of the colours. The R a 8-value is also coded in the term of light colour: the first digit describes the R a 8 (light colour 954 corresponds to a R a > 90, this is a very good value). 91

93 Fig. 23: R a 8 reference colours, source CIE 13.3 As well it was defined an enlarged CRI Ra14, for the calculation where several additional colours (4 saturated colours, pink and chlorophyll green) are also taken into account. See Fig. 24. Fig. 24: Test colours, saturated & additional colours, source CIE

94 The light colours are divided into groups, each covering a particular colour temperature range: Light colour Colour temperature Skywhite 8000 K Daylight > 5000 K Cool White K Warm White < 3300 K For a better understanding of OSRAM light colours, see detailed table below, selected with under groups: Light colour Colour temperature Skywhite 8000 K Cool Daylight 6500 K Daylight > 5000 K Cool White K White 3500 K Warm White < 3300 K INTERNA 2700 K There are various ranges for the Ra value, known as colour rendering groups: Ra value Group Characteristic (according to EN ) A Very good B Good A Satisfactory B Satisfactory Adequate Unsatisfactory Fig. 25: Colour rendering group in accordance to EN How to interpret OSRAM Lamp coding: The first digit in the international colour code stands for the colour rendering: 9 = colour rendering R a 90 to = colour rendering R a 80 to 89 7 = colour rendering R a 70 to 79 6 = colour rendering R a 60 to 69 The next digits stands for the light colour/colour temperature: 27 = 2700 K 30 = 3000 K 35 = 3500 K 40 = 4000 K 54 = 5400 K 65 = 6500 K 80 = 8000 K 93

95 Note: The colour perception of a non-luminous colour therefore always depends on the colour temperature of the illuminating lamp and colour rendering properties of this lamp. Example: Blue tones will always appear brighter in the light from a lamp with a daylight colour than in the light from a lamp with a warm white colour, even if both lamps have an Ra value of 100. OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps are available in LUMILUX, LUMILUX DE LUXE light colours and special light colours. The most economical lighting is achieved with LUMILUX. These light colours fall into colour rendering group 1B, which means they are ideal for most applications (including office and shop lighting, hotel and restaurant lighting, living rooms and outdoors). In places where colour rendering is a particular important factor (e.g., art galleries, museums, laboratories and graphical trades), lamps are also supplied in LUMILUX DE LUXE light colours or COLOR PROOF. As group 1A lamps, these offer the best colour rendering. However, their luminous flux is lower than their LUMILUX counterparts; therefore more lamps are needed to achieve the same lighting level. Ultimately, the choice of light colour depends on the specific application, room conditions and personal preference Colour specifications Light colour Reference Colour Temperature K Colour rendering Group EN Colour rendering index CRI Ra 965 2) LUMILUX DE LUXE Cool Daylight A 90 LUMILUX De LUXE 950 LUMILUX DE LUXE Daylight A LUMILUX DE LUXE Cool White A LUMILUX DE LUXE Warm White A 90 LUMILUX 880 LUMILUX Skywhite B LUMILUX Daylight B LUMILUX Cool White B LUMILUX Warm White B LUMILUX INTERNA B 80 Special light colours 1) 60 Red Chip control Green Blue Natura Fluora ) Lamps with chromaticity coordinates that do not lie in the vicinity of the reference radiators (Judd lines; see CIE calculation method) cannot, by definition, be assigned a colour temperature and hence cannot be assigned a colour rendering index 2) BIOLUX 94

96 2.3.3 Factors affecting colour consistency There are a number of factors that affect colour consistency and the perception of the light colour of single and double capped fluorescent lamps. Iridescence Iridescence is a property of some anodised reflector finishes which results in a rainbow, effect when used in conjunction with tri-chrome phosphors. Since all OSRAM lamps contain tri-chrome phosphors, this effect caused by the reflector may be wrongly ascribed to the lamps as different light colours. Ambient temperature The light colour of fluorescent lamps changes slightly as the ambient temperature changes because of the relationship between visual emission lines of excited Hg versus pressure and temperature. This is apparent in applications in which, say, open ceiling light fittings are installed close to air-condition outlets. In such cases, the light colour may be slightly different from that of light fittings located further away. This effect can be minimised by coordinating the air-conditioning system with the lighting system. Manufacturing tolerances There may be minimal differences in the light colours of lamps from different manufacturers. In applications in which colour consistency is a critical factor, all the lamps in a particular zone should come from the same manufacturer and should all be replaced together. If lamps are replaced individually there may be differences in light colour. Best result can be reached with lamps out of one production batch. Dimming When fluorescent lamps are dimmed there is a slightly difference in colour temperature. The colour temperature of a fully dimmed OSRAM T5 fluorescent HO 54 W lamp, for example, is around 150 K higher than that of an undimmed lamp. The colour difference appears greater to the eye due the considerable differences in luminance. Even greater differences may occur temporarily if there is a sharp change in the dimmer setting. Ageing Generally speaking, there are only slightly changes in colour temperature or shifts in chromaticity coordinates in the course of a lamp s service life. However, lamps do suffer a drop in luminous flux as they age (see 2.4) and it is the resulting difference in luminance between an old lamp and a new lamp that gives the impression of a change in colour temperature. 95

97 2.3.4 Spectral distribution The relative spectral power distribution is determined mainly by the light colour, whereas the different models and wattages have a negligible effect. The spectral distributions shown below are therefore typical of all OSRAM LUMILUX lamps for the relevant light colour (relative values). The spectral irradiance distributions refer to an illuminance of 1000 lx. The advantage here is that the absolute values of any illuminance can be found simply by dividing by 1000 lx: The spectral intensities are condensed into wavelength ranges of 5 nanometres. In other words, irrespective of the actual distributions, the values given have been integrated over 5 nm. This corresponds to the standard applied to all calculations of consequential results (such as colour and colour rendering). The spectral power distribution (see Fig. 26) of OSRAM DULUX LUMILUX and LUMILUX DE LUXE lamps can be found in the latest edition of the Lighting Program. Fig. 26: Example of spectral distribution for light colour 60 Red Spectral distribution for all LUMILUX colours, see attachment 2. Spectral distribution for all LUMILUX DE LUXE colours, see attachment 3. Spectral distribution for all special light colours, see attachment 4. 96

98 2.3.5 Radiation components in the ultra-violet range Ultra-violet radiation can have desirable effects (e.g., tanning) and undesirable ones (e.g., sunburn) on the human body. The intensity of these effects depends on the irradiance level and the period of exposure. In the ease of lamps intended for general lighting applications, lamp and light fitting manufacturers must ensure that there is no possibility of any harmful effects even under high illuminance levels over a full day. All OSRAM single and double capped fluorescent lamps comply with the safety limits of UV and Blue light components set by the IEC Safety Standard Photo-biological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems. For spectral radiation values, consult the spectral radiation data sheet for the related light colour in attachment 2 or consult our website If light-sensitive materials are exposed to this light for relatively long periods, there may be some change in colour (e.g., bleaching). In OSRAM DULUX lamps this effect is caused primarily by UV-A radiation. Lamps with low UV-A components or low illuminance levels (lx) in the application should therefore be chosen for illuminating light-sensitive materials Radiation components in the infra-red range Fluorescent lamps emit radiation at wavelengths which are also used for infra-red transmissions. Since the IR receivers used for televisions, wireless headphones and sound transmission systems, for example, are often not sufficiently selective there may be interference in the IR system, particularly with lamps operated by electronic control gear, if light or optical radiation from the lighting system enters the IR receiver. The light emitted by a fluorescent lamp is essentially modulated at twice the operating frequency (50 to 250 khz in the case of electronic control gear and 100 or 120 Hz in the case of conventional control gear). Interference may occur if the useful signal is also operating in this frequency range. Audio transmission For further information on this topic please consult the OSRAM QUICKTRONIC technical guides or visit our website IR remote control Interference-free operation is possible with systems that work with a sufficiently high carrier frequency (400 to 1500 khz). If interference occurs in systems or equipment operating at a lower carrier frequency, it is best to move the IR receiver as far as possible away from the radiation footprint of the lamp or shield it from direct light. For further information on this topic please consult the OSRAM QUICKTRONIC technical guides or visit Electronic merchandise security systems (theft protection) In many shops nowadays, merchandise such as CDs and clothing is protected against theft by electronic security systems. These systems typically operate with resonances in the khz range. If the operating frequency is between 30 khz and 150 khz it may lead to interference. Such interference can be avoided by increasing the distance between the light fittings and the transmitting/receiving system. For further information on this topic please consult the OSRAM QUICKTRONIC technical guides or visit 97

99 2.3.7 Luminous intensity distribution charts The luminous intensity distributions of OSRAM single and double capped fluorescent lamps depend on the plane in which measurements are taken. For assessment and planning purposes, it is therefore not sufficient simply to consider the average of all planes. Measurements of the luminous intensity distribution in three selected planes are adequate Luminance of single and double capped fluorescent lamps Lamp average luminance 1) cd/cm² L 10 W UC L 15 W 1.0 L 16 W 0.8 L 16 W ES UC L 18 W 2)3)4) 1.0 L 23 W UC L 30 W 1.2 L 32 W ES UC L 36 W 2)3)4) 1.2 L 36 W L 38 W UC L 51 W ES UC L 58 W 2)3)4) 1.5 HE 14 W 1.7 HE 21 W 1.7 HE 25 W ES 1.7 HE 28 W 1.7 HE 32 W ES 1.7 HE 35 W 1.7 HO 24 W 2) 2.5 HO 39 W 2) 2.8 HO 45 W ES 2.3 HO 49 W 2)3) 2.3 HO 50 W ES 2.9 HO 54 W 2)3) 2.9 HO 73 W ES 3.2 HO 80 W 2)3) 3.2 HE 14 W SLS HE 21 W SLS HE 28 W SLS HO 24 W SLS HO 39 W SLS HO 54 W SLS UC UC UC UC UC UC FC 22 W 1.7 FC 40 W 2.1 FC 55 W 2.6 1) For light colours 827, 830, 840, operated with reference control gear and maximum luminous flux 2) Also for CONSTANT lamps 3) Also for XT 4) Also for XXT lamps 98

100 other light Lamp average luminance 640 colours 827/830/ EL cd/cm² cd/cm² cd/cm² cd/cm² L 4 W 1) 0.85 L 6 W 1)5) L 6 W 3)5) UC UC L 6 W 4) UC L 8 W 1)5) L 8 W 2) UC L 8 W 3)5) L 8 W 4) UC L 13 W 1) 0.8 L 13 W 2) UC L 13 W 3) 0.8 L 13 W 4) UC 1) For light colour 640, operated with reference control gear 2) For light colour 765, operated with reference control gear 3) For light colour 827, 830, 840, operated with reference control gear 4) For light colours 930, 954, operated with reference control gear 5) Also for Emergency Lighting, EL versions. Only in light colour

101 2.4 Lamp life and maintenance Definitions There are several definitions 4) consult relevant IEC or EN standard of lamp life, which are applied differently depending on the type of lamp, the lamp manufacturer and the geographical region. The most important definitions for single and double capped fluorescent lamps are given below. Lamp life is the period of time during which a lamp can be operated until it is unusable (electrical failure, light loss / insufficient light output). Average rated lamp life (B50) is the average value of the life values of individual lamps operated under standardized conditions (50 % failure). In other words, this is the operation time at which for a standardized 3-hour switching cycle (165 minutes on/15 minutes off in accordance with IEC and IEC 60901) 50 % of a sample population of lamps have failed. See Fig. 27, Fig. 28, Fig. 29 and Fig. 30. B10 lamp life (B10) is the value of the life time values of individual lamps operated under standardized conditions (10 % failure). In other words, this is the operation time at which for a standardized 3-hour switching cycle (165 minutes on/15 minutes off in accordance with IEC and IEC 60901) 10 % of a sample population of lamps have failed. See Fig. 27, Fig. 28, Fig. 29 and Fig. 30. Service life time is the mathematical life time (maintenance multiplied with the % of failed lamps e.g. B10) for lamps in an installation after which the installation luminous flux (100 h value) decreased with 20 % (decrease in luminous flux and failed lamps) for indoor lighting. See Fig. 27, Fig. 28, Fig. 29 and Fig. 30. For further information, please consult Maintenance is used to indicate how well the luminous flux is retained throughout the life of the lamp. Because chemical changes in the phosphor during the lamp life, the luminous flux of the lamp decreases as the lamp ages. Life time values single and double capped fluorescent lamps are always different when lamps are operated with magnetic ballast and starter or electronic control gear. Note: After each lamp replacement in light fittings equipped with magnetic ballast, the starter must be replaced together with the failed lamp to avoid that lamp life time is shortened (too low ignition voltage, to long preheating of the electrode coil). Exception: Starters ST171 SAFETY, ST172 SAFETY, ST173 SAFETY when operated at 3 h IEC switching cycle, starter need to be replaced at the 4 lamp replacement. 100

102 Maintenance, mortality, installation luminous flux 80% (100h) for T8 fluorescent lamps, CCG operation. Graph parameters in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC Maintenance, life time, installation luminous flux in (%) Maintenance in (%) Mortality in (%) Service life time in (h) 80% luminous flux Operation time in (h) Fig. 27: Graph maintenance, mortality, Installation luminous flux,t8 LUMILUX double capped fluorescent lamps CCG operation, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC 100 Maintenance, mortality, installation luminous flux 80% (100h) for T8 fluorescent lamps, ECG operation, preheated. Graph parameters in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC Maintenance, life time, installation luminous flux in (%) Maintenance in (%) Mortality in (%) Service life time in (h) 80% luminous flux Operation time in (h) Fig. 28: Graph maintenance, mortality, Installation luminous flux,t8 LUMILUX double capped fluorescent lamps ECG operation, preheated, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC 101

103 Fig. 29: Graph maintenance, mortality, Installation luminous flux, T5 HE LUMILUX and T5 HO LUMILUX double capped fluorescent lamps ECG operation, preheated, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC Maintenance, mortality, installation luminous flux 70% (100h) for T5 FC circular fluorescent lamps, ECG operation, preheated. Graph parameters in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC. Maintenance, life time, installation luminous flux in (%) Maintenance in (%) Mortality in (%) Service life time in (h) 70 % luminous flux Operation time in (h) Fig. 30: Graph maintenance, mortality, Installation luminous flux,t5 FC circular single capped fluorescent lamps ECG operation, preheated, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC 102

104 Life time and reliability ECGs The failure rate of electronic components depends not only on the component specification and quality but to a large extent on the operating temperature. The electronic operating devices from OSRAM are so designed that at the maximum permissible device temperature (t c max.) a failure rate of less than 0.2 % per 1,000 h of operation can be expected. This corresponds to an ECG life of 50,000 h at a percentage failure rate of 10 %. In actual practice it can be assumed that at a temperature 10 C less than the maximum permitted temperature (t c ) the life of an ECG is doubled. See Fig. 31. At t c max., value printed at the measurement location on the housing of the ECG, life time is 50,000 h with a failure rate of < 10 % for: QTi DALI Dim T5, QTi DALI DIM T8, QTi Dim T8, HF DIM QTi GII, QTP 5, QTP-FC QTP8, QT-FIT8. Fig. 31: Influence of the maximum t c temperature of the ECG on the failure rate and operating hours If maximum t c temperature on the housing of the ECG is exceeded by 10 C, then the announced failure rate will increase dramatically. See Fig

105 2.4.2 Maintenance for OSRAM circular single and linear double capped fluorescent lamps Operation time 2,000 h 4,000 h 8,000 h 16,000 h Fig. 32: Maintenance T8 LUMILUX linear double capped fluorescent lamps, CCG operation in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC Operation time 2,000 h 4,000 h 8,000 h 16,000 h Fig. 33: Maintenance T8LUMILUX linear double capped fluorescent lamps, ECG operation, preheated, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC Operation time 2,000 h 4,000 h 8,000 h 16,000 h Fig. 34: Maintenance T5 HE and HO LUMILUX linear double capped fluorescent lamps, ECG operation, preheated, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC Operation time 2,000 h 4,000 h 8,000 h 16,000 h Fig. 35: Maintenance T5 FC LUMILUX circular single capped fluorescent lamps, ECG operation, preheated, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC For further information about maintenance figures, please consult 104

106 2.4.3 Mortality tables of OSRAM circular single and linear double capped fluorescent lamps Operation time 2,000 h 4,000 h 8,000 h 16,000 h Fig. 36: Mortality T8 LUMILUX linear double capped fluorescent lamps, CCG operation, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC Operation time 2,000 h 4,000 h 8,000 h 16,000 h Fig. 37: Mortality T8 LUMILUX linear double capped fluorescent lamps, ECG operation, preheated, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC Operation time 2,000 h 4,000 h 8,000 h 16,000 h Fig. 38: Mortality T5 HE LUMILUX linear double capped fluorescent lamps ECG operation, preheated, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC Operation time 2,000 h 4,000 h 8,000 h 16,000 h Fig. 39: Mortality T5 HO LUMILUX linear double capped fluorescent lamps ECG operation, preheated, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC Operation time 2,000 h 4,000 h 8,000 h 12,000 h Fig. 40: Mortality T5 FC LUMILUX circular single capped fluorescent lamps, ECG operation, preheated, in accordance to the commission regulation (EC) N 245/2009 implementing directive 2005/32/EC For further information about mortality figures, please consult 105

107 2.4.4 Effect of switching operations on lamp life Average rated lamp life in CCG operation is based on a switching cycle of 165 minutes on and 15 minutes off in accordance with IEC See Fig. 41. In CCG operation, if there are fewer switching operations than under these standard conditions, average rated lamp life can be increased. If, however, the lamp is switched on and off more often, it will not last as long. Note: CCG operation with a new installed lamp and new starter. If the starter is not replaced together with the failed lamp, reduced lamp life has to be taken under account. See Starters IEC switching cycle 3h (165 minutes on, minutes off). Average life time T8 LUMILUX, CCG 80 operation 13,000h. CCG constructed for V 50Hz. 60 CCG = Classic Control Gear (magnetic) Typical life time 10 in (%) Switching cycle in (h) Fig. 41: CCG operation, typical average lamp life in relation to the switching cycle Typical lamp life in (%) T8 fluorescent lamps, CCG operation - typical lamp life in relation to the switching cycles If an electronic control gear designed for preheated start according to IEC is used, the number of possible switching operations is increased compared to operation with a CCG, due to an optimum electrode preheating and preheating time. Note: Using a preheated designed ECG build upon an older technology; it is possible that after the lamps have been switched off, it is necessary to wait a certain time, before switching on the lamps again, to ensure a reliable warm restart of the lamps (see ECG specifications of the specific ECG manufacturer). In any case, using the modern types of OSRAM ECG, it is not necessary to wait a certain time anymore. There is no restriction on switching cycles or switching off time periods affecting the lamp life, under normal operation conditions. If an electronic control gear designed for an instant start is used, the number of possible switching cycles is strongly decreased compared to an operation with preheated ECG. For an operation with instant start ECG, a maximum of 2 switching cycles per day is recommended, without affecting the lamp life. The following recommendation is for operation of OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps T8, T5 HE, HO and HO CONSTANT in combination with OSRAM-ECGs combined with motion sensors, stair case timer switches and other timer switches. See Fig

108 ECG Lamp Fluorescent lamps linear T5 HE, HO, HO CONSTANT QTi DALI DIM QTi DIM QTi G II QTP5 - QT-FIT8 - QTP-DL - - QTP-D/E, T/E - - QTP-M Fig. 42: The following lamps can be used with OSRAM-ECGs in applications with high switching cycles. Minimum ON time should be 3 minutes before switching OFF to improve the lamp s life Fluorescent lamps linear T8 Comments: 1. Using staircase timer switches with switch-off early warning, may result, depending on the ECG-family, either in an instant lamp start (instant light on again, no lamp pre-heat) or to a prolonged off-time (about 1 sec. light off) during the blinking / warning sequence. Instant start can significantly reduce the lamp s life. 2. T5 HO CONSTANT (Amalgam dosed lamps) can be frequently switched with above mentioned ECGs. It should be noticed that longer run-up times (to reach maximum luminous flux) can appear when switching on after a longer off time. This has no negative impact on the lamp life. 3. For better comfort and safety, we recommend reducing the light level with or without switching-off completely. Please use OSRAM DALI MULTIeco for DALI-ECGs and OSRAM DIM MULTIeco for 1 10 V dimmable ECGs. The remaining light level can be adjusted to 10 %, 30 % or 50 % depending on demand. The increase or decrease of the light level can be done manually by pushbutton or automatically by presence detection. 4. Using fluorescent lamps with dimmable ECGs, burning-in of lamps has to be done at 100 % power. Interruptions during burning-in time are permitted. We recommend 100 hours burning-in time, to enable perfect lamp operation and maximum lamp life. 107

109 3 Circuits 3.1 Operation with electronic control gear (ECG) All OSRAM T5 diameters HE, HE ES Energy saver, HE SLS SEAMLESS, HO, HO ES Energy Saver, HO CONSTANT, HO XT, HO SLS SEAMLESS and T5 FC lamps have been designed to operate exclusively with electronic control gear only. OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps linear 26 mm T8 diameter can be operated with either electronic or magnetic control gear. To ensure safe operation of both, the lamp and the ECG, the wiring between the outputs of the ECG and the terminals on the lampholder(s) must be correct. This applies not only to two-lamp arrangements but also to single-lamp configurations. Certain cables from the ECG to the lamp or lamps ( hot ends ) should be kept as short as possible to avoid issues with radio interference. This means one should choose an asymmetrical mounting location in the light fitting to increase the length of the low potential cables if you can thereby shorten the lamp cables carrying high potential. The correct circuit layout is generally printed on the ECG casing. Check with the ECG manufacturer to establish which terminals are the hot ends. This information may be shown on the casing (e.g. keep wires x and y short ). With dimmable ECGs the length of the control cable(s) and the way in which they are laid also play a role. For further information on this topic please consult the OSRAM QUICKTRONIC technical guides or visit Another important factor with ECGs is the t c -measuring point on the casing. The temperature indicated here must not be exceeded during operation otherwise the unit can fail prematurely. A prominent characteristic of electronic control gear, and one that applies to most units (see information on the casing) is whether or not it is suitable for DC operation (for approximately the same rms values for AC and DC). In many cases, a DC-compatible ECG can also be used in emergency lighting systems. The relevant local regulations governing emergency lighting must be observed: nearly all QUICKTRONIC control gear from OSRAM is suitable for emergency lighting. The old standard DIN VDE was withdrawn in March 2007 and replaced by European standard DIN EN (to be considered as a consensus paper). It covers only fundamental questions related for safety illumination. For the OEM it became easier in accordance to existing regulations. In force remain the standard IEC for the light fitting and IEC for the control gear. Light fittings for emergency lighting are regulated by the IEC and the control gear by the IEC Between standards for illumination there is no discern made between application and product, for that in Europe the standard EN 1838 emergency lighting and on international level ISO Emergency lighting are at disposal. 5) For more information consult: Not- und Sicherheitsbeleuchtung Bruno Weis, Hans Finke Information from the manufacturers regarding circuits (circuit diagrams) can generally be found on the casing cover. For further information on permissible lamp/ecg combinations and system data please consult the latest edition of the OSRAM Lighting Programme or use the lamp/ecg configurator on 108

110 3.2 Operation with conventional control gear (CCG) OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 diameter needs an additional starter (LONGLIFE or SAFETY) and a suitable magnetic ballast for CCG operation. It is recommended that only suitable lamp/ccg combinations for single and series circuits are used. The system data (lamp + CCG) is shown in the table Circuit diagrams. See Fig. 43, Fig. 44, Fig. 45 Fig. 43: Single CCG / starter circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 diameter For single operation of T8 lamps at mains 230 V 50 Hz AC. Starter, single circuit: ST111 LONGLIFE 4 65W;80W ST171 DEOS SAFETY 36 65W ST173 DEOS SAFETY 15 32W Fig. 44: Series CCG / starter circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 diameter Series circuit for 2 lamps 16 W ES, 18 W at mains 230 V 50Hz AC Starter, series operation: ST151 LONGLIFE 4 22W ST172 DEOS SAFETY 18 22W Fig. 45: Lead-Lag CCG / starter circuit for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 diameter. One circuit is inductive the second capacitive, both together produce a power factor in the neighbourhood of 1 Starter, single circuit: ST111 LONGLIFE 4 65W;80W ST171 DEOS SAFETY 36 65W ST173 DEOS SAFETY 15 32W 109

111 Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 diameter are not suited to operate in light fittings equipped with instant start or rapid start CCG. See Fig. 46 and Fig. 47. This mode of operation isn t supported by OSRAM D: Ballast (choke) H: Heating transformer KE: Radio interference capacitor 10nF UN: Mains Z: Capacitor starting aid Fig. 46: Rapid start circuit, low ignition voltage is reached by external Preheated of both electrodes and ignition aid A: External starting strip (aid) DD: Double ballast (choke) K2: Capacitor KE: Radio interference capacitor 10nF Un: Mains Fig. 47: Semi resonant start circuit, by external electrode preheated, reduced ignition voltage, by semi resonance increased open circuit voltage, high transformed capacitance realise compensation for the power factor from about 1, for fluorescent lamps with external ignition aid on their lamp glass 110

112 3.2.1 Permissible lamp/ccg combinations and system data OSRAM fluorescent lamps should be operated only with suitable control gear. If the control gear has a too high rating the lamps will be overloaded by an excessively high current, which may shorten their life and overheat the lamp cap. If, however, the gear has a too low rating the lamps will not be supplied with enough current; this may damage the lamp and therefore again shorten its life. Normally, if the lamps are under loaded in this way, an excessive increase in lamp voltage will cause the starter to switch. The following table provides a summery of suitable magnetic control gear: Lamp CCG 3) L 10 W 2x8-16 ( mA) L 15 W 2x8-16 ( mA) 2 x L 15 W 2x8-16 ( mA) L 16 W 2x8-16 ( mA) L 16 W Energy Saver ( mA) 2 x L 16 W Energy Saver (430mA) L 18 W 1)2) ( mA) 2 x L 18 W (430mA) L 23 W ( mA) L 30 W 30 (365mA) L 32 W Energy Saver (430mA) L 36 W (430mA) L 36 W-1 - L 38 W (430mA) L 51 W Energy Saver 58 (670mA) L 58 W 58 (670mA) L 70 W 70 (700mA) 1) CCG developed for 18 W CFL, 220 ma: with this combination, however, there are considerable restrictions regarding the life of the lamp 2) CCG developed for 26 W CFL, 315 ma: with this combination, however, there are considerable restrictions regarding the life of the lamp 3) If released by the ballast manufacturer Compensation The need to compensate for the reactive power depends on the technical connection conditions of the electricity supply company. Compensation for reactive power is covered in Germany in the guideline TAB 2007 (Technische Anschlussbedingungen für den Anschluss an das Niederspannungsnet see Entladungslampen). Compensation can be provided on an individual basis per light fitting, for groups of light fittings or at a central location. Generally, electricity consumption should involve a power factor of between cos ϕ = 0.9 (capacitive) and 0.8 (inductive). Depending on the type of system, which obviously comprises more inductive loads than just lowvoltage discharge lamps, one has to decide which type of compensation should be used: 111 Individual compensation per light fitting Group compensation Central compensation. The capacitor must be connected in parallel with the mains terminals. Compensation with a series capacitor is possible under certain circumstances but, not recommended since the permissible current and power limits cannot be reliably maintained if the permissible tolerances for the capacitors, control gear and lamps are fully utilized. The limits for exploiting the permitted tolerances (close tolerance) for the capacitance of the series capacitor (IEC or EN 61049) and the impedance of the choke (IEC or EN 60920) or lamps cannot be reliably met. Mains parallel capacitors are not permitted in existing audio-frequency remote control systems operating at high frequency. They are suitable only for compensation with series capacitors. Compensation is not required if the lamps are operated with electronic control gear.

113 The following table shows the capacitance values for the various lamps: Lamp Parallel compensation 1) 230 V/50 Hz μf L 10 W L 15 W L 16 W L 16 W ES /480 V L 18 W 1) /480 V L 23 W - - L 30 W /450 V L 32 W ES /450 V L 36 W 1) /450 V L 36 W /480 V L 38 W /450 V L 51 W ES /450 V L 58 W 1) /450 V 1) Also for XT and XXT Series compensation 2) 450 V/50 Hz or 480 V/50 Hz μf Operation of double capped fluorescent linear shape 16 mm T5 on CCG For safety and performance reasons double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 16 mm T5 diameter HE, HE ES, have been designed and standardised for operation with electronic control gear. Nevertheless CCG s for T5 HE, HE ES and HO, HO ES in combination with electronic starters are available on the market. Mid 2011 the announcement was made for the commercialisation of magnetic control gear with very low loss (EEI = A2) for operation with T5 HE 21 W, 35 W or HE ES 19 W, 32 W and HO 54 W or HO ES 52 W lamps from a competitor in combination with a specific electronic starter. It has to be understood that this kind op operation for T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO ES is not supported by OSRAM, as many external influences may have a negative impact on the performance of the lamps and its safety behaviour in general. The lighting component manufacturer always bears the responsibility that his design and construction will work properly and that the lamps will operate within the specifications. T5 HE, HE ES, HE SLS, HO, HO ES, HO CONSTANT, HO XT, HO SLS are not released for operation with classic control gear (CCG, very low loss magnetic ballast and electronic starter). For safety reasons this kind of electrical operation isn t supported by OSRAM. 112

114 3.3 Operation on DC sources Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 diameter cannot be operated on DC sources with conventional control gear. Most ECGs developed for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 16 mm or T8 26 mm diameter are DC-compatible. The DC voltage must be around the rated mains voltage of 230 V. See information supplied by ECG manufacturers and relevant international standard IEC : Particular requirements for DC supplied electronic ballast for general lighting. Special attention is recommended for the operation with DC lamp current. For all kind of fluorescent lamps their current is flowing in one direction in DC operation. Positive mercury ions are transported from the positive anode in the discharge to the negative cathode. When a lamp is operating in 24 h mode this leads to the situation that all mercury will migrate in the discharge to the negative cathode, so that the light colour in the discharge vessel of the lamp will turn red This is the reason why DC operation with single or double capped fluorescent lamps over a longer operation time must be avoided. Under those circumstances it is recommended to change continuously polarity over the whole operation time of the lamp. Changeover units (emergency light fittings with internal changeovers, known as battery packs) are offered. See international standard IEC : Particular requirements for battery supplied electronic control gear for emergency lighting (self contained). These feed the lamps directly on an internal emergency power supply in the light fitting and interrupt the system circuit between the ECG and the lamps. These changeover units for emergency lighting must reliably comply with the parameters for preheating and for operating the lamps. An operation with a DC component causes electrophoresis in the lamp. As a result, the mercury migrates from one electrode to another if the lamp is operated continuously. This greatly reduces the life of the lamp. OSRAM therefore cannot guarantee the life of the lamp. Another factor with negative effect on lamp life in emergency operation mode, is often a higher current crest factor, and also due to an insufficient energy supply of the emergency unit, a cold start of the lamp Single and double capped fluorescent lamps in emergency lighting Requirements for emergency lighting Emergency lighting applications often supply a significantly reduced discharge current with respect to the specified discharge current without auxiliary coil heating. This is done to extend the operational time when the system is operated on batteries. From the description of dimmed fluorescent lamp operation it is well known that if a fluorescent lamp is operated below 80 % of the standardized test current auxiliary coil heating is necessary in order to prevent an increase of the cathode fall voltage, which will lead to sputtering on the coil and early lamp failure. See Fig. 48, Fig. 49 and Fig. 50. Fig. 48: Example of a new coil with intact emitter and a coil damaged by sputtering 113

115 Known main issues for emergency lighting results from: Not appropriated coil preheating before ignition Not appropriated coil preheating at the moment of restrike when switch-over from normal mains voltage (AC) to DC voltage (battery mode in the light fitting) Too low discharge current without additional coil preheating Too high CCF ( Current Crest Factor, shape of current waveform) 0,05 SoS min SoS tar SoS max SoS 1 Pin SoS 2 Pin 0,04 Coil too hot, evaporation effects SoS max SoS [A*A] 0,03 0,02 SoS without preheating: only Idis, current feeding only in one pin Target 0,01 Coil to cold, sputtering effects SoS min 0 0 0,025 0,05 0,075 0,1 0,125 0,15 I discharge [A] SoS without preheating: Only I dis, current feeding by both pins with each 50% Fig. 49: Result Sum of square measurement for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape SoS: Sum of Squares see Fig. 50: Measurement procedure Sum of Square If a lamp is operated in the so called dimmed zone of discharge current below 80 % of the test current without any coil heating, lamp life will be reduced by a higher factor the lower the discharge current to test current ratio gets. The diagram, see Fig. 51, below shows a rough estimate of operational time which can be expected. If a lamp is operated in the dimmed zone without auxiliary heating, the coil will be damaged as explained above. See Fig. 48. If the operation in the dimmed zone is only for a limited time interval and the lamp is then again operated according to the specification, the damage can be partly corrected. Unfortunately the coil cannot recover completely from the damage. The more often dimmed operation without coil heating happens the more lamp life is further reduced. It is very difficult to estimate this lamp life reduction because it strongly depends on the time schedule of normal operation (i.e. according to the specification) and dimmed operation without coil heat. 114

116 Estimated lamp life reduction with reduced discharge current 100% 80% lamp life [% rated] 60% 40% 20% 0% 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% 120% 140% discharge current [% rated] Fig. 51: Estimated lamp life reduction with reduced discharge current for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 Short (T8, T5 FC, and all whole family of T5 HE and HO excluded) T8, T8 ES, T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO ES, HO CONSTANT, HO XT and T5 FC fluorescent lamps are not standardised for emergency lighting. OSRAM does not support this kind of operation. 115

117 3.4 Operation with motion detectors and light sensors It is basically possible to operate single and double capped fluorescent lamps in conjunction with motion detectors and light sensors. Bear in mind that in these arrangements the lamps operate only for short periods before switching off again, so the run-up time for light output (the time the lamp takes to reach 100 % luminous flux) and the reduction in lamp life (old ECG technology) due to the high number of switching operations are factors that must be taken into account (see 2.4.4). CCG-operated single and double capped fluorescent lamps should not be used in applications with extremely frequent on/off switching. Instead, only fluorescent lamps released for ECG operation should be used. The ECG should be selected to ensure optimum lamp starting every time. Not all types of ECGs are suitable for a very frequent switching, like it is the case by motion detectors. Only preheated ECGs are suitable. Even here some models need a certain time out after switching off, to ensure a warm re-start of the lamp with correct preheated by the next switch on. It is necessary to refer to the technical data sheet of the ECG or request the information about the suitability of the ECG for very frequent switching by the manufacturer. Stand-by operating modes are ideal for such applications. In stand-by mode the light is dimmed when it is not needed. This avoids unnecessary switching operations and saves energy. Because the light is never fully switched off there is always a certain amount of light available for people to find their way around. Full light is available instantly, with no pre-heating delay. Typical applications for stand-by mode include all those with frequent on/off switching, such as stairwells, corridors and underground garages. Particularly if the light is controlled with motion detectors or time switches. 116

118 3.5 Dimensioning of automatic circuit breakers Information on the maximum permitted number of light fittings per automatic circuit breaker can be found in the OSRAM Lighting Program 2012 and on In a CCG circuit all lamps in the light fittings do not ignite simultaneously for different reasons (lead lag light fitting inductive/capacitive lead, older starters mixed with new once, mains voltage drop in different circuits). All lamps will ignite simultaneously after switch-on when operated with an ECG. When an ECG is switched-on, a starting current pulse of very short duration current pulse (< 1 ms) occurs as the storage capacitors responsible for the internal power supply charge up. If a large number of ECGs are switched-on simultaneously; particularly if all ECG s are switched-on at peak rated voltage. A higher very brief starting current will flow which will reduce the recommended number of installed ECGs per automatic circuit breaker below the number which would be applied if we were to consider only their rated currents. Under these circumstances, the simultaneous charging of these capacitors in ECG operation can mean a higher system switch-on current than for a traditional starter/ballast circuit. All switching equipment and protection devices must therefore be selected according to their current carrying capacity. In general MCB (Miniature Circuit Breakers) with tripping characteristic B are used, MCB with C-characteristic are used for higher power loads with high inrush current. When using the values given in the tables, please note the following: In ECG operation the load data relates to starting at peak rated voltage. (e.g. at the most onerous time as far as the current is concerned) The specified load from fluorescent lamps and associated ECG applies to N automatic circuit breakers (SIEMENS type 5 SN I-2 and 5 SX) with B characteristic. If the above circuit breakers types with C characteristic are used, the number of permitted light fittings approximately doubles in ECG operation. The specified load applies to single-pole automatic circuit breakers. If multi-pole automatic circuit breakers are used (2-pole and 3-pole) the permitted numbers of light fittings is reduced by 20 %. For CCG operation, the specified load applies to group starting of the relevant number of light fittings. For ECGs, it applies to the maximum number of ECGs that can be switched simultaneously. The specified values apply for a line impedance of 800 mw. This corresponds to a 15 m length of 1.5 mm² cable from the distribution board to the first light fitting and a further run of 20 m to the middle of the lighting circuit. At 400 mw, the permitted values are reduced by 10 % and at 200 mw at 20 %. QUICKTRONIC INTELLIGENT Maximum number of ECGs Inrush capacity with automatic circuit breakers. Ip (A) T H (µs) B 10A B 16A C 16A C po (µf) QTi 1x14/24/21/39 GII QTi 1x 28/54/35/49 GII QTi 1x35/49/80 GII QTi 2x14/24/21/39 GII QTi 2x28/54/35/49 GII QTi 2x35/49/ QTi-DP 1x28/35/LED

119 QUICKTRONIC PROFESSIONAL QTP5 1 st Generation Maximum number of ECGs with automatic circuit breakers. Ip (A) T H (µs) B 10A B 16A C 16A C po (µf) QTP5 1x QTP5 1x QTP5 1x QTP5 1x QTP5 1x QTP5 2x QTP5 2x QTP5 2x QTP5 2x QUICKTRONIC PROFESSIONAL QTP5 2 sd Generation Maximum number of ECGs with automatic circuit breakers. Ip (A) T H (µs) B 10A B 16A C 16A C po (µf) QTP5 1x QTP5 1x QTP5 1x QTP5 1x QTP5 1x QTP5 2x QTP5 2x QTP5 2x QTP5 2x QT-FQ 2x QTP5 3x14/4x Inrush capacity Inrush capacity QUICKTRONIC QT Maximum number of ECGs with Inrush capacity automatic circuit breakers. Ip (A) T H (µs) B 10A B 16A C 16A C po (µf) QT-FC 1x55/ S QUICKTRONIC INTELLIGENT DALI Maximum number of ECGs with Inrush capacity DIM automatic circuit breakers. Ip (A) T H (µs) B 10A B 16A C 16A C po (µf) QTi DALI 1x14/24 DIM QTi DALI 1x21/39 DIM QTi DALI 1x28/54 DIM QTi DALI 1x35/49/80 DIM QTi DALI 2x14/24 DIM QTi DALI 2x21/39 DIM QTi DALI 2x28/54 DIM QTI DALI 2x35/49 DIM QTi DALI 2x35/49/80 DIM QTi DALI 3x14/24 DIM QTi DALI 4x14/24 DIM

120 QUICKTRONIC INTELLIGENT DIM Maximum number of ECGs with Inrush capacity (1-10V) automatic circuit breakers. Ip (A) T H (µs) B 10A B 16A C 16A C po (µf) QTi 1x14/24/ DIM QTi 1x21/39/ DIM QTi 1x28/54/ DIM QTi 1x35/49/80/ DIM QTi 2x14/24/ DIM QTi 2x21/39/ DIM QTi 2x28/54/ DIM QTI 2x35/49/ DIM QTi 2x35/49/80/ DIM QTi 3x14/24/ DIM QTi 4x14/24/ DIM QUICKTRONIC PROFESSIONAL Maximum number of ECGs with Inrush capacity QTP8 automatic circuit breakers. Ip (A) T H (µs) B 10A B 16A C 16A C po (µf) QTP8 1x QTP8 1x QTP8 1x QTP8 2x QTP8 2x QTP8 2x QTP8 3x18,4x QUICKTRONIC FIT Maximum number of ECGs with Inrush capacity automatic circuit breakers. Ip (A) T H (µs) B 10A B 16A C 16A C po (µf) QT-FIT8 1x QT-FIT8 1x QT-FIT8 1x QT-FIT8 2x QT-FIT8 2x QT-FIT8 2x QT-FIT8 3x/4x QT-FIT8 3x QUICKTRONIC DE LUXE HF DIM (1-10V) Maximum number of ECGs with Inrush capacity automatic circuit breakers. Ip (A) T H (µs) B 10A B 16A C 16A C po (µf) HF 1x18/ DIM HF 1x36/ DIM HF 1x58/ DIM HF 2x18/ DIM HF 2x36/ DIM HF 2x58/ DIM

121 QUICKTRONIC INTELLIGENT DALI Maximum number of ECGs with Inrush capacity DIM automatic circuit breakers. Ip (A) T H (µs) B 10A B 16A C 16A C po (µf) QTi DALI 1x18 DIM QTi DALI 1x36 DIM QTi DALI 1x58 DIM QTi DALI 2x18 DIM QTi DALI 2x36 DIM QTi DALI 2x58 DIM QTi DALI 3x18 DIM QTi DALI 4x18 DIM QUICKTRONIC INTELLIGENT DIM Maximum number of ECGs with Inrush capacity (1-10V) automatic circuit breakers. Ip (A) T H (µs) B 10A B 16A C 16A C po (µf) QTi 1x18/ DIM QTi 1x36/ DIM QTi 1x58/ DIM QTi 2x18/ DIM QTi 2x36/ DIM QTi 2x58/ DIM QTi 3x18/ DIM QTi 4x18/ DIM

122 3.6 RCDs / Fault currents In the case of ECGs with protective earth (PE) connections, both the high short duration starting current and the small continuous current through the interference suppression capacitors in the ECG can trip the Residual Current Detector (RCD). RCD sensivity is expressed as the rated residual operating current, I n. Preferred values have been defined by IEC, thus making it possible to divide RCDs into 3 groups according their I n value. High sensitivity (HS): ma (for direct-contact / life injury protection) Medium sensitivity (MS): ma (for fire protection) Low sensitivity (LS): A (typically for protection of machine) The following solutions may be considered: Divide the light fittings into three phases and use three-phase RCDs Use surge-current-resistant, short delay RCDs Use 30 ma RCDs (if possible) In 3.5 are the values for QUICKTRONIC ECG for operation with T8 and T5 HE, HO double capped and T5 FC single capped fluorescent lamps. 3.7 Leakage currents In protection class I light fittings, the final HF filter in an ECG with PE conductor connection produces a 50 Hz leakage current through the earth conductor whose value depends on the product type. This 50 Hz leakage current limits the number of ECGs that can be operated on a RCD. For all QUICKTRONIC ECG for operation with T8 and T5 HE, HO double capped and T5 FC single capped fluorescent lamps the following applies: Leakage current < 0.5 ma 121

123 4 Operation characteristics 4.1 Start-up characteristics Single circuit, inductive operation Series circuit, inductive operation ECG operation Preheated (preheated) OSRAM QUICTRONIC ECG, preheated with standardised energy the cathodes to its optimum temperature for electron emission at any time (even after the lamp was shortly switched-off and then switched-on again). After a defined preheated time of the filament on the cathode, the lamp is ignited with the required ignition voltage. Only an optimised preheated start can guarantee that the number of switching cycles have nearly no effect on the lamp life ECG operation Instant start (cold start) An instant start ECG, switch-on the lamp without preheating the filament of the cathode by using a high voltage. The cold filament, its emissive oxides and metal parts of the filament material are blasted away from the cold cathode surfaces each time the lamp is switched-on. High numbers of switches have a huge impact on life time decrease of the lamp. Important to reach the life time of the lamp is a maximum number of switching cycles of 2 per day. 4.2 Starting at low temperatures Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 26 mm diameter operated with magnetic ballast and traditional starter (LONGLIFE and SAFETY see 6.8 Starters) are ideal for use in outdoor lighting systems where temperatures during the cold season may be 0 C or below. Some lamps with higher lamp power (e.g. L 58 W in closed light fitting) will ignite quite readily and friendly even at those low temperatures, and some others (e.g. L 18 W) have critical ignition limits. When selecting lamps and light fittings, therefore, the temperature factor should also be considered. Special attention must be made for the choice of the starter which will switch-on the 26 mm T8 fluorescent lamps. OSRAM LONGLIFE and SAFETY starters switch-on the lamp in an ambient temperature range of -20 C up to +80 C. Repeated attempts to ignite the lamp in a ballast starter circuit at low temperatures will damage the lamp. Therefore it is recommended to use a SAFETY starter like ST171 which switch-off the lamp when a too long ignition time is needed for the lamp. The time to switch-on the lamp can be influenced by many parameters such as: 122 Low mains voltage Moisture on the lamp and in the light fitting Lamp orientation Starting aid to close to the lamp glass To high capacitance of the wiring inside the light fitting Aged starter (at each lamp replacement, the starter must be replaced too. Exception DEOS SAFETY Starters which operate at 3 h IEC switching cycle) Reliable ignition (inductive operation) of the lamps takes place at rated voltage within a period of 30 s. There is a chance that these ignition times will increase as the lamps age (ageing of the starters) or if moisture penetrates the light fitting. In capacitive operation a longer ignition time than with inductive operation must be expected.

124 In the case of inductive operation with reduced voltage, the temperature threshold for reliable ignition of the lamps is raised. This longer ignition time must be taken into account. Complementary to that, it must be observed that when a single or a double capped fluorescent lamp is switch-on at an ambient temperature of 0 C or below, that the more Hg atoms will condensate on the cold spot. Only a low number of free Hg atoms will be available in the discharge vessel so that the lamp may start with a pink light colour. With increasing glass wall temperature, mercury vapour pressure will increase and more free Hg atoms will be released in it. This results in a change of the light colour from pink light into white light. With electronic control gear, the temperature range for reliable ignition is extended downwards, even for critical models. Irrespective of the ambient temperature, the lamp is always supplied with the optimum preheated energy, preheated time and ignition pulse. Repeated attempts to ignite the lamp at low temperatures are avoided in ECG operation. The temperature range in which an ECG will reliably switch-on a lamp depends on the ECG itself. Consult the ECG manufacturer for more details. Depending on the particular lamp and the particular ECG used, OSRAM QUICKTRONIC ECG switch-on fluorescent lamps at temperatures as low as -15 C or -20 C. For a reliable ignition of the single capped and double capped fluorescent lamps in magnetic and ECG operation the advised distance between the lamp glass wall and all metal grounded parts in a light fitting is minimum 6 mm (see IEC and IEC 60901), for all types of fluorescent lamps T8, T5 and T5 FC. For T5 HE SEAMLESS and HO SEAMLESS lamps a minimum distance between the lamp glass wall and all grounded metal parts of the light fitting of minimum 10 mm is advised. 4.3 Run-Up behaviour The start-up behaviour of OSRAM fluorescent lamps depends on more factors: e.g. type of the lamp, type of the control gear (whether ECG or CCG), ambient temperature, operation position, switch-off time, volume and the construction of the light fitting and others. Relative luminous flux in [%] Run-up time of a T8 fluorescent lamp, reference control gear operation Run-up time in [min] Fig. 52: Typical run-up behaviour of OSRAM T8 LUMILUX reference control gear operation, 25 C ambient temperature, mains voltage 220 V/50 Hz, freeoperating, horizontal operation position 123

125 Run-up time T8 LUMILUX, ECG Operation Relative luminous flux in [%] Run-up time in [min] Fig. 53: Typical run-up behaviour of OSRAM T8 LUMILUX ECG operation, 25 C ambient temperature, mains voltage 230 V/50 Hz, free-operating, horizontal operation position Fig. 54 in preparation: Typical run-up behaviour of OSRAM T8 ENERGY SAVER 26 mm LUMILUX CCG operation, 25 C ambient temperature, mains voltage 230 V/50 Hz, free-operating, horizontal operation position Run-up behaviour T5 HE, T5 HO (Standard) Relative luminous flux in [%] T5 HE Standard T5 HO Standard Run-up time in [min] Fig. 55: Typical run-up behaviour of OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE and HO 16mm LUMILUX ECG operation, 25 C ambient temperature, mains voltage 230 V/50 Hz, free-operating, horizontal operation position 124

126 Run-up behaviour of T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamps The run-up behaviour of 16 mm T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamps is slower compared to the standard Cold Spot 16 mm T5 HO LUMILUX lamps (See Fig. 55 and Fig. 56). That s because the amalgam in the discharge vessel absorbs almost all of the mercury out of the gas in the tube during the off time period. It needs to heatup properly after ignition, to release again the mercury to the discharge. Therefore T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamps run-up slower or start even as mercury free, with pink light output for a short time, until the amalgam heats up and create mercury vapour pressure. This vapour pressure has to be distributed to the whole gas filling. This behaviour can be especially observed under lower temperatures. Therefore in CONSTANT lamps an additional run-up amalgam is positioned in the direct neighbourhood of the electrode. After the lamp is switched on, the electrode will heat up the flag containing the run-up amalgam, so that mercury is directly released into the discharge. This results in a quick run-up behaviour of the T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamp that is, after 2 minutes, nearly identical to a Cold Spot lamp. Once all the mercury from the run-up amalgam is released, the operation amalgam will take over the Hg vapour pressure control, until its final stabilization (until the light output is stabilized). The run-up behaviour of a T5 HO 49 W CONSTANT is different than for all other T5 HO CONSTANT lamps, see Fig. 56, Fig. 57 and Fig. 58. The reason for this difference in run-up behaviour is produced by the lower discharge current for T5 HO 49 W CONSTANT. Run-up behaviour T5 HE, T5 HO an T5 HO CONSTANT (T5 49W CONSTANT excluded) 100 Relative luminous flux in [%] T5 HE Standard T5 HO Constant T5 HO Standard Run-up time in [min] Fig. 56: Typical run-up behaviour of OSRAM T5 HO 16mm LUMILUX CONSTANT (HO 49 W not included) compared to T5 HE and HO Cold Spot, ECG operation, 25 C ambient temperature, mains voltage 230 V/50 Hz, free-operating, horizontal operation position 125

127 Relative luminous flux in [%]. Run-up T5 HO 49W CONSTANT Run-up time in [min] Fig. 57: Typical run-up behaviour of OSRAM T5 HO 16mm LUMILUX 49 W CONSTANT in ECG operation, 25 C ambient temperature, mains voltage 230 V/50 Hz, free-operating, horizontal operation position. T5 HO 49W CONSTANT compared to T5 HO 49W Run-up behaviour Relative luminous flux in [%] HO 49W Constant HO 49W Run-up time in [min] Fig. 58: Typical run-up behaviour of OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HO 49 W CONSTANT 16mm LUMILUX ECG operation, 25 C ambient temperature, mains voltage 230 V/50 Hz, free-operating, horizontal operation position 126

128 4.4 Operating values of the lamps as a function of mains voltage Operating position: horizontal, free-operating Ambient temperature: 25 C 130 T8: typical curves for electrical and photometric data in relation to the variation of mains voltage supply, inductive operation (CCG) Phi, I, U, P, eta [%] Phi I U P eta Voltage mains [%] Fig. 59: Typical curves for the electrical an photometric data for T8 LUMILUX fluorescent lamps in relation to mains voltage variation, CCG operation. For ECG operation the variation of luminous and electrical parameters with variation of mains voltage depends strongly on the individual ECG design. There are current constant, power controlled and mixed controlled characteristics available, which keep the respective electrical parameters more or less constant. The photometric parameters of the lamp will follow the operational parameters of the ECG. Operating position: horizontal, free-operating Ambient temperature: 25 C 101 T5 HE and HO ECG operation, electrical and photometric data in relation to the variation of mains voltage 100,8 100,6 100,4 Phi, I, U, P, eta [%] 100, ,8 99,6 99,4 Phi I U P eta 99, Mains voltage in (%) Fig. 60: Typical curves for the electrical an photometric data T5 HE and HO LUMILUX in relation to the variation of mains voltage, ECG operation 127

129 4.5 Operation values of single and double capped fluorescent lamps Operation position: horizontal Mains voltage Reference control gear relative value electrical parameters in (%) 1,00 0,95 0,90 0,85 0,80 0,75 0,70 0,65 0,60 0,55 T8 26 mm fluorescent lamps electrical parameters, reference CCG 50Hz operation in relation to the ambient temperature U lamp I lamp P lamp 0,50-20 C -10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Ambient temperature in ( C) Fig. 61: Curves for the electrical data in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for 26 mm T8 LUMILUX operation with reference control gear 220 V 50 Hz Operation position: horizontal Mains voltage Reference IEC HF ballast 1,00 T8 26 mm fluorescent lamps electrical parameters, IEC HF operation in relation to the ambient temperature 0,95 0,90 meas. values [%] 0,85 0,80 0,75 0,70 0,65 0,60 U lamp I lamp P lamp 0,55 0,50-10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C ambient temperature [ C] Fig. 62: Curves for the electrical data in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for 26 mm T8 LUMILUX operation with IEC HF ballast 128

130 Operation position: horizontal Mains voltage Reference control gear 1,00 0,95 0,90 T8 51 W ES, Energy Saver lamps, electrical parameters CCG operation 50Hz in relation to the ambient temperature. meas. values [%] 0,85 0,80 0,75 0,70 0,65 0,60 U lamp I lamp P lamp 0,55 0,50-20 C -10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C ambient temperature [ C] Fig. 63: Curves for the electrical data in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for 26 mm T8 51W ES LUMILUX operation with reference control gear 230 V 50 Hz. Operation position: horizontal Mains voltage Electronic ballast 1,00 0,95 0,90 T8 51W ES Energy saver, ECG operation, electrical values in relation to the ambient temperatur Electrical values in (%)l 0,85 0,80 0,75 0,70 0,65 0,60 0,55 0,50 0,45 0,40 U lamp I lamp P lamp 0,35-10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Ambient temperature [ C] Fig. 64: Curves for the electrical data in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) 26 mm T8 LUMILUX Energy saver, operation with ECG current controlled 129

131 Operation position: horizontal Mains voltage Reference IEC HF ballast 1,00 T5 HE in operation with IEC reference control gear, electrical values in relation to the ambient temperature 0,95 0,90 Relative electrical values in (%) 0,85 0,80 0,75 0,70 0,65 0,60 U lamp I lamp P lamp 0,55-10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Ambient temperature in ( C) Fig. 65: Curves for the electrical data in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for 16 mm T5 HE LUMILUX reference IEC HF control gear Operation position: horizontal Mains voltage Reference IEC HF ballast 1,00 T5 HO reference IEC HF operation, electrical values in relation to the ambient temperature 0,95 0,90 0,85 Electrical values in (%) 0,80 0,75 0,70 0,65 0,60 0,55 U lamp I lamp P lamp 0,50-10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Ambient temperature in ( C) Fig. 66: Curves for the electrical data in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for 16 mm T5 HO LUMILUX reference IEC HF control gear 130

132 Operation position: horizontal Mains voltage QUICKTRONIC QTi G II T5 HE Energy Saver operated with QUICKTRONIC QTi, electrical values in relation to the ambient temperature 1,00 0,95 0,90 0,85 Electrical values in (%)l 0,80 0,75 0,70 0,65 0,60 U lamp I lamp P lamp 0,55 0,50-20 C -10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Ambient temperature in ( C) Fig. 67: Curves for the electrical data in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for 16 mm T5 HE Energy saver LUMILUX,ECG QTi GII operation Operation position: horizontal Mains voltage Reference IEC HF ballast 1,00 T5 HO 73W ES Energy Saver in operation with IEC reference control gear, electrical parameters in relation to the ambient temperature 0,95 0,90 meas. values [%] 0,85 0,80 0,75 0,70 0,65 0,60 U lamp I lamp P lamp 0,55-10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Temperature [ C] Fig. 68: Curves for the electrical data in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for 16 mm T5 HO Energy Saver LUMILUX operation with IEC reference control gear 131

133 Operation position: horizontal Mains voltage Reference IEC HF ballast T5 HO CONSTANT operation on IEC reference control gear, electrical values in relation to the ambient temperature 1,00 0,95 measurement values in (%) 0,90 0,85 U lamp I lamp P lamp 0,80-10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Ambient temperature in ( C) Fig. 69: Curves for the electrical data in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for 16 mm T5 CONSTANT LUMILUX operation with IEC reference control gear Operation position: horizontal Mains voltage EVG QUICKTRONIC QTi GII ECG 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% -10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Ambient temperature U lamp I lamp P lamp Lum. Flux Fig. 70: Curves for the electrical data in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for T5 HE SEAMLESS LUMILUX operation with QUICKTRONIC QTi GII 132

134 Operation position: horizontal Mains voltage EVG QUICKTRONIC QTi GII ECG 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% 0% -10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C Ambient temperature U lamp I lamp P lamp Lum. Flux Fig. 71: Curves for the electrical data in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for T5 HO SEAMLESS LUMILUX operation with QUICKTRONIC QTi GII 133

135 4.6 Luminous flux as a function of temperature and operation position Luminous flux/temperature graphs for double capped fluorescent lamps T8 in general OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 LUMILUX achieve 100 % luminous flux at ambient temperatures from 20 C up to 25 C respectively, depending on the operating position, after a certain run-up time has elapsed, as the graphs below show (see Fig. 72). 100% 80% L18 L58 Relative luminous flux in (%) 60% 40% 20% L36 Phi 58W Phi 36W Phi 18W 0% Ambient temperature in ( C) Fig. 72: Relative luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for T8 26 mm LUMILUX, operation with IEC 50 Hz reference control gear Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 ES LUMILUX Energy Saver reach their maximum luminous flux at 35 C ambient temperature instead of 20 C up to 25 C like traditional 26 mm T8 LUMILUX lamps (see Fig. 73). Already at 20 C ambient temperature there is 30 % decrease in luminous flux compared to traditional T8 Technology. T8 ES LUMILUX Energy saver lamps are not suited for operation in existing light fittings at low temperatures. OSRAM do not support this kind of application. Those lamps are ideal to operate in higher temperature ranges and will produce the same illumination level in the installation when they replace 26 mm T8 BASIC Lamps in the existing light fitting. Relative luminous flux in % 1,000 0,950 0,900 0,850 0,800 0,750 0,700 0,650 0,600 0,550 0,500 0,450 0,400 0,350 0,300 0,250 0,200 0,150 0,100 0,050 0, C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Ambient temperature in C Fig. 73: Relative luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for T8 26 mm ES LUMILUX Energy Saver operated with a reference control gear 134

136 4.6.2 Luminous flux/temperature graphs for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 in general OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE or HO LUMILUX range achieves 100 % luminous flux at an ambient temperature of about 35 C. See Fig. 74. Fig. 74: Relative luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for T5 16 mm HE and HO LUMILUX operated with a reference control gear For free-operating lamps, the average ambient lamp temperature around the lamp is in direct relation with the room temperature in which the measurement is performed. If one lamp or several lamps are operated under standardised measurement conditions (see IEC or EN 60598) in light fittings, the temperature in the immediate vicinity of the lamp is the one that is relevant to any measurement of luminous flux. See Fig. 75. The electrical and photometric parameters of the lamp will be stabilised for that lamp ambient temperature at a specific cold spot temperature which is in direct relation with the mercury vapour pressure of the lamp. 135

137 The luminous flux of the lamp produced under those circumstances may be close to the target value but can also be over or under that value. The volume of the light fitting will have a direct relation to that. If room ambient temperature or ambient temperature outside the light fitting increase or decrease, cold spot temperature of the lamp will be influenced in the light fitting by a decrease or increase in temperature and result in an loss of increase of luminous flux. The lamps can be operated in any operating position. However, different operation positions and different ambient temperatures will lead to different luminous flux values. This is due to temperature changes at certain locations on the lamp. Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape and single capped circular shape their electrical and photometric parameters are always measured in horizontal operation position in accordance with the relevant standard IEC or EN or IEC or EN or otherwise specified in the relevant standard. Fig. 75: How to understand ambient temperature difference between room temperature and Lamp ambient temperature OSRAM double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE or HO LUMILUX Energy saver range achieves 100 % luminous flux at an ambient temperature of about 35 C. There is no significant difference in luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature for both lamp families T5 HE or HO LUMILUX and T5 HE or HO Energy Saver LUMILUX. See Fig. 74 and Fig

138 Relative luminous flux [%] T5 HE ES and HO ES Energy Saver, luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature, operated with IEC HF reference control gear 100% 95% 90% 85% 80% 75% 70% 65% 60% 55% 50% 45% 40% 35% 30% 25% 20% 15% 10% 5% 0% -10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Ambient temperature [ C] Fig. 76: Relative luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE and HO Energy Saver operated with a reference control gear Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 16 mm HO LUMILUX CONSTANT technology, its amalgam controls mercury vapour pressure and luminous flux. Similarly to the cold spot, the amalgam temperature is affected not only by the ambient temperature, but in certain way by the operating position of the lamp. 100% T5 HO and HO CONSTANT, luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature, IEC HF reference control gear 90% 80% Relative luminous flux in (%) 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% T5 Constant T5 Standard Hg 20% 10% 0% Ambient temperature ( C) Fig. 77: Relative luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for 16 mm HO LUMILUX and HO LUMILUX CONSTANT operated with a IEC HF reference control gear Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamps are optimised for various temperature ranges. They are an ideal solution for high and low ambient temperatures. See Fig % of their maximum luminous flux is produced over a wide temperature range from 5 C to 70 C (exception T5 HO 49 W LUMILUX CONSTANT temperature range 20 C up to 80 C see Fig. 79). Installed in a suitable designed light fitting, the lamps are able to achieve high performance even under cold ambient temperatures too. See Fig. 78 and Fig

139 If double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 LUMILUX, 16 mm T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT and T5 HO LUMILUX Cold Spot lamps are combined in the same installation there will be visible differences in colour perception and brightness. For this reason these two types may not be mixed. Luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature for different fluorescent lamp technologies and their operation mode 100% luminous flux Phi in [%] 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% HO54W Constant [%] HO54W [%] L58W CCG [%] HO49W Constant [%] L 58W ECG 10% 0% -20,0-10,0 0,0 10,0 20,0 30,0 40,0 50,0 60,0 70,0 80,0 ambient temperature [ C] Fig. 78: Relative luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for 26 mm T8 CCG and ECG operation, 16 mm T5 HO cold spot ECG operation, T5 HO CONSTANT ECG operation and T5 HO 49W CONSTANT ECG operation Fig. 78, give you best overview of T8 and T5 double capped fluorescent lamp families and their behaviour at low and high ambient temperatures. T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT 24 W, 39 W, 54 W, 80 W are suited for applications with low and high ambient temperatures. T5 HO 49W LUMILUX CONSTANT is not suited for an application at low ambient temperature because of a bigger loss in luminous flux than with traditional T8 TECHNOLOGY. Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 16 mm HO 49 W LUMILUX CONSTANT posses the lowest discharge current (0.255A) of all HO Lamps 24 W, 39 W, 54 W, 80 W CONSTANT, this is the main reason why the temperature range in which 90 % of the luminous flux is reached is different. T5 HO 49 W CONSTANT reaches 90 % of luminous flux in a temperature range from 20 C up to 80 C instead of 5 C up to 70 C. See Fig

140 100 Principal behavior of lumen output at different ambient temperatures T5 HE/HO and T5 Constant and T5 HO 49W Constant 90 relative luminous flux [%] lamp ambient temperature [ C] T5 HO/HE T5 HO Constant T5 HO 49 Constant Fig. 79: Relative luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for T5 HO CONSTANT operated with a reference control gear For a stable performance and measurement of the electric and photometric parameters of T5 FC and double capped fluorescent lamps T8 26 mm, 16 mm T5 HE or HO in ECG operation or 26 mm T8 with CCG operation an aging period of 100 h is required under any circumstance Luminous flux/temperature graphs for single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC in general 1,000 T5 FC 55W - Luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature 0,950 0,900 0,850 0,800 Relative meas. values [%] 0,750 0,700 0,650 0,600 0,550 0,500 0,450 0,400 0,350 0, C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Ambient temperature [ C] Fig. 80: Relative luminous flux in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) for single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape T5 FC LUMILUX measured with a reference HF control gear 139

141 4.6.4 Operation at high temperatures Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 diameter, its cold spot is located in the centre of the lamp and is measured on the lamp glass wall. The lamp is designed to reach its optimum luminous flux at an ambient temperature of 20 C up to 25 C, operated with reference control gear see IEC in draught free air. Cold spot temperature for optimum Hg vapour pressure is set at ca. 50 C lamp glass wall temperature. See Fig. 4 and Fig. 9. This correlated cold spot temperature can be measured in the middle of the lamp on its glass bulb with a fixed thermocouple. See Fig. 81. The measured cold spot temperature value can then be transferred on the horse shoe curve to define the luminous flux. See horse shoe curves Fig. 82, Fig. 83, and Fig. 84. Fig. 81: Picture of a T8 Lamp. point Location and measurement of the cold spot on a double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape 26 mm T8 glass diameter Horse shoe curve T26mm(T8) L18W 20 C 95% 30 C 85% 40 C 44/52/60 C 10 C 50 C 68 C Relative luminous flux [%] 75% 65% 55% 45% 70 C 60 C 96 C 87 C Temperature on the glass in the middle of the tube 77 C 22 C 0 C Ambient temperature around the lamp, 10 cm distance 35% 13 C -10 C 25% Lamp voltage [V] Fig. 82: Horse shoe curve luminous flux in relation to the lamp arc voltage for 26 mm T8 18 W. Cold spot in relation to ambient temperature. Operated with reference control gear 140

142 Horse shoe curve T26mm(T8) L36W 100% 90% 40 C 56 C 30 C 39/48 C 20 C Relative luminous flux [%] 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% Temperature on the glass in the middle of the tube 17 C 0 C 50 C 65 C 28 C 10 C Ambient temperature around the lamp, 10 cm distance 30% 12 C -10 C 20% Lamp voltage [V] Fig. 83: Horse shoe curve luminous flux in relation to the lamp arc voltage for 26 mm T8 36 W. Cold spot in relation to ambient temperature. Operated with reference control gear relative luminous flux [%] 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% Temperature on the glass in the middle of the tube 8 C 18 C Horse shoe curve T26mm(T8) L58W -10 C 60 C 70 C 50 C 74/84 C 95 C 40 C 28 C 65 C 0 C 30 C 57 C Ambient temperature around the lamp, 10 cm distance 40/49 C 20 C 10 C 10% -20 C 0% Lamp voltage [V] Fig. 84: Horse shoe curve luminous flux in relation to the lamp arc voltage for 26 mm T8 58 W. Cold spot in relation to ambient temperature. Operated with reference control gear Single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape 16 mm T5 FC is designed to reach its maximum luminous flux at an ambient temperature of 25 C. Cold spot temperature is measured on the exhaust tube its pip located at the inside of the lamp cap 2GX13. See Fig

143 Cold spot location on the exhaust tube Fig. 85: T5 FC Lamp, location and measurement point of the cold spot on the exhaust tube. Thermocouple is hidden by the lamp cap Cold spot temperature for optimum Hg vapour pressure is set at ca. 47 C up to 53 C lamp glass exhaust tube temperature. See Fig. 86, Fig. 87 and Fig. 88. T5 FC22W (nearly constant power supply) 105% 100% 95% 67 C 62 C 40 C 57,1 C 52, C 25 C 48 C Relative luminous flux in (%) 90% 85% 80% 75% 70% 71, ambient temperatur 36,5 15 C 39,5 C 20 C 43,5 65% 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% 85% 90% 95% 100% 105% Lamp voltage in (V) Fig. 86: Horse shoe curve luminous flux in relation to the lamp arc voltage for 16 mm T5 FC 22 W. Cold spot in relation to ambient temperature. Operated with reference control gear 142

144 T5 FC40W (nearly constant power supply) 105% 100% 56,5 C 51,9 35 C 47,3 C 30 C 41,1 C 95% 90% 61,6 C 45 C 40 C 25 C 20 C 37,7 C Relative luminous flux in (%) 85% 80% 75% 70% 70,8 C 75,5 C 60 C 79, ,2 C 55 C 50 ambient temperatur 15 C 29,2 C 33,2 C 65% 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% 85% 90% 95% 100% 105% Lamp voltage in (V) Fig. 87: Horse shoe curve luminous flux in relation to the lamp arc voltage for 16 mm T5 FC 40 W. Cold spot in relation to ambient temperature. Operated with reference control gear T5 FC55W (nearly constant power supply) 105% 100% 52,5 C 47,2 C ,7 C 95% 58, ,4 C Relative luminous flux in (%) 90% 85% 80% 75% 70% 63,2 C 40 C 35 C ambient temperatur 31,9 C 65% 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% 85% 90% 95% 100% 105% Lamp voltage in (V) Fig. 88: Horse shoe curve luminous flux in relation to the lamp arc voltage for 16 mm T5 FC 55 W. Cold spot in relation to ambient temperature. Operated with reference control gear Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE and HO 16 mm lamp glass diameter are designed to reach their maximum luminous flux at an ambient temperature of 35 C or ca. 49 C cold spot temperature, see Fig. 5. The lamp is operated exclusively with electronic ballast (ECG). In all T5 HE and HO 16mm, the cold spot is located on the etch side (OSRAM stamp) of the lamp glass wall behind the electrode. There the electrode mounting is set deeper in the lamp. See Fig. 89. Under those circumstances a cooler spot is created behind the electrode, here all surplus of mercury in the discharge can condense there so that optimum balance in mercury vapour pressure can exist. Best location for cold spot measurement is located at 1 mm distance from the changeover lamp cap material to lamp glass wall. See Fig

145 Etch side or OSRAM stamp Non etch side Fig. 89: Cold spot location on a T5 HE and HO 16mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape Best correlated location, measuring point for the Cold Spot, at 1 mm distance from the metal cap rim on the glass tube. Fig. 90: Best correlated location for cold spot for T5 HE and HO 16 mm glass wall diameter. 144

146 Fig. 91: Horse shoe curve luminous flux in relation to the lamp arc voltage for T5 HE 16 mm. Cold spot in relation to ambient temperature. Operated on reference control gear 100% 95% 90% 50 C 45 C 58.9 C C 35 C 48.3 C C 30 C 85% 80% 75% 70% C 70 C 75 C 55 C 72.5 C 77.1 C 81.7 C 86.3 C 68.1 C 63.6 C Cold Spot temperature C 34.7 C 20 C rel. lum. flux 65% 60% 55% 80 C 91.1 C 26.9 C 10 C 50% 45% 22.8 C Ambient temperature in C 40% 5 C 35% 30% 18.6 C 0 C 25% lamp voltage [V] Fig. 92: Horse shoe curve luminous flux in relation to the lamp arc voltage for T5 HO 16 mm. Cold spot in relation to ambient temperature. Operated on reference control gear 145

147 Additionally the light fitting will generally have a large radiating surface which will ensure moderate tube wall temperatures and high efficiency. Therefore there is a tendency to make light fittings as small as possible. Often the thermal characteristics are ignored so that the lamp or lamps in that kind of light fitting will operate at a too high mercury vapour pressure (too high lamp ambient temperature) that is generated by the high cold spot temperature. In particularly small enclosed light fitting systems the temperatures at the points on double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape that have a major influence on luminous flux are so high that luminous flux and therefore the efficiency of the lamp and of the light fitting are reduced significantly. Since in such cases the lamps are no longer operated at their optimum, see horse shoe curves Fig. 91 and Fig. 92. There are also changes in the electrical values of the lamp (reduced lamp power) at high ambient temperatures, which in turn will impair the control gear (CCG and or ECG operation). Therefore it is important to take into account the maximum temperatures permitted on the lamp (see 4.8 Lamp temperature, safety and limit values). Etch side lamp (OSRAM Stamp, Run-up and operation amalgam) Non etch side, Hg dosing Fig. 93: Amalgam location on a T5 HO CONSTANT 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape At high ambient temperatures, where T5 16 mm HO LUMILUX cold Spot lamps cannot be operated at their optimum (reduced luminous flux), it is advisable to use T5 16 mm HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamps to achieve maximum luminous flux. Since they achieve their optimum mercury vapour pressure over a wide range of lamp ambient temperature, CONSTANT lamps operate at their optimum efficiency under the same conditions in narrow light fittings and therefore achieve a higher lamp power. All the electrical and photometric values (lamp current, lamp voltage and luminous flux) relate to the higher lamp output. In narrow light fittings equipped with T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamps more heat can be released compared to Cold Spot T5 HO LUMILUX lamps. This can lead to an increase in temperature at the IEC measuring point of the lamp and the T c point of the electronic control gear and must be taken into consideration when designing the light fittings, or when replacing a Cold Spot lamp by a CONSTANT lamp in an existing fitting. For more information related to the maximum permitted temperature at the IEC measuring point, see 4.7 Lamp temperature, safety and limit values. Measurement point amalgam flag location: see fig. 102 and fig.103 as well as the relevant publication under sub-paragraph cold spot and amalgam temperatures on page 156 and the summery on page

148 Fig. 94: Typical horse shoe curve luminous flux in relation to the lamp arc voltage for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO CONSTANT 16 mm. Amalgam temperature in relation to ambient temperature. Operated with reference control gear Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE SEAMLESS and T5 HO SEAMLESS 16 mm lamp glass diameter are designed to reach their maximum luminous flux at an ambient temperature of 30 C or ca. 45 C cold spot temperature for T5 HE SLS and ca. 47 C cold spot temperature for T5 HO SLS. The lamp is operated exclusively with electronic ballast (ECG) type QUICKTRONIC QTi GII. Best correlated measurement point for cold spot temperature measurement see Fig Relative luminous. flux 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% -5 C 60 C 65 C 70 C 75 C 0 C 5 C 10% 60% 65% 70% 75% 80% 85% 90% 95% 100% 55 C 10 C Relative lamp voltage 50 C 45 C 15 C 40 C 35 C 20 C Temperature values represent ambient temperature 30 C 25 C Fig. 95: Typical horse shoe curve luminous flux in relation to the lamp arc voltage for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE SLS luminous flux in relation to the lamp voltage. Operated with an electronic control gear type Qti GII 147

149 100 C 75 C 50 C 25 C T bulb T coldspot 0 C -10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C Ambient temperature Fig. 96: T5 HE SLS operated with ECG QTi II, glass wall temperature and cold spot temperature in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) Relative luminous flux 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% -5 C 0 C 5 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C 75 C 80 C 10 C 45 C 15 C 40 C Temperature values represent ambient temperature 35 C 20 C 30 C 25 C 0% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100% Relative lamp voltage U Fig. 97: Typical horse shoe curve luminous flux in relation to the lamp arc voltage for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HO SLS luminous flux in relation to the lamp voltage. Operated with an electronic control gear type Qti GII 100 C 50 C T bulb T coldspot 0 C -10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C 70 C 80 C 90 C Ambient temperature Fig. 98: T5 HO SLS operated with ECG QTi II, glass wall temperature and cold spot temperature in relation to the ambient temperature (-10 C up to 80 C) 148

150 4.6.5 Operation at low temperatures. The following points must be taken into account when operating single or double capped fluorescent lamps on magnetic ballasts or ECGs at low temperatures: 1. The control gear (plus components) must be capable of starting at the required temperature. 2. After ignition, the tube wall must warm up sufficiently for the lamp to operate within its optimum range. The low ambient temperatures at which double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 LUMILUX and ENERGY SAVER will ignite reliably in conjunction with magnetic ballasts are shown in 4.2 Starting at low temperatures. If operated with suitable electronic control gear, T5 FC LUMILUX lamps, T5 HE, HE ES ENERGY SAVER, HO, HO ES ENERGY SAVER, HO CONSTANT can ignite at even lower temperatures. In low-temperature applications, the lamps should be used only in enclosed light fittings. It is important for the light fitting to be of such volume, that the lamp(s) can warm up rapidly so that ambient temperatures at which the lamps will operate efficiently are reached within a short time (especially using T5 HO CONSTANT lamps, which need a longer time to reach the optimal temperature and light output see 4.3 Run-Up behaviour). If there are considerable fluctuations in temperature, the luminous flux/temperature graphs for the different operating positions should be designed in order to achieve a suitable compromise between lamp and light fitting efficiency. Operation at low ambient temperatures should be taken into consideration when designing the light fitting, especially for T5 HO CONSTANT lamps. This is to improve the run-up behaviour and to enable the lamps to reach an optimal and stable luminous flux level Influence of high and low temperatures on lamp colour temperature In this chapter we will give the OEM a better view in what can happen under certain operation conditions with colour temperature shift at low and high ambient lamp temperatures. Under ambient lamp temperature must be understood the temperature around the lamp. See Fig. 75 and 4.6 Luminous flux as function of temperature and operation position. Ambient lamp temperature will be influenced by: Its mode of operation (vertical or horizontal operation). Magnetic or electronic ballast. Mains voltage variation (CCG operation). Dimmable or non-dimmable operation. Open lighting fitting, closed lighting fitting. The construction of the light fitting, its topology, lamp glass distance to the reflector, distance lamp to lamp and wiring Steady air or air flow around the lamp. Ambient room temperature. For T5 HE and HO (Energy saver and XT lamps included) for twin or multiple lamp executions, lamp etch (marking) of each lamp should face each other. Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 26mm LUMILUX : Mercury vapour pressure from double capped fluorescent lamps T8 (all types, Energy Savers, XT und XXT included) is defined by the lamp its cold spot temperature. There is a direct relation between Hg-vapour pressure and the luminous flux. Optimum luminous flux (optimum quantity of Hg atoms released in the Hg-vapour discharge) is reached at a cold spot temperature of around 50 C measured on the lamp glass in the middle of the lamp length for fluorescent lamps T8 26 mm at an ambient lamp temperature of 20 C up to 25 C. See 4.6.4, fig. 81. Under these operation conditions the lamp will reach its nominal colour temperature with a tolerance of ± 200K. With increasing ambient lamp temperature in the lamp environment, cold spot temperature and Hg-vapour pressure (higher quantity of Hg atoms released in the Hg-vapour discharge) will increase and have 149

151 as result that nominal luminous flux will start to decrease as well as the lamp power with as result that colour temperature of the lamp will show a strong increase at maximum ambient lamp temperature of 80 C Luminous flux will decrease under those operation circumstances with ca. 60% for a maximum allowed cold spot-temperature of 100 C. This reduction of luminous flux has also as influence a decrease in luminance (cd/cm²) of the T8 fluorescent lamp. If the phenomenon is reversed and the lamp operates under cold ambient lamp temperatures the lamp will perform a decrease in cold spot temperature and Hg-vapour pressure (lower quantity of Hg atoms released in the Hg-vapour discharge). Under those conditions the electrical parameters of the lamp will change and produce a lower lamp power with a decrease of the luminous flux. At -10 C a T8 fluorescent lamp its luminous flux will decrease at about 20% for a cold spot temperature of 8 C up to 10 C on the glass wall in the middle of the lamp. Colour temperature at this low ambient lamp temperature will show a minor decrease. Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE and HO 16mm LUMILUX : Mercury vapour pressure for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE and HO lamps (Energy saver and XT lamps included) is defined by the lamp its cold spot temperature and is in direct relation to the Hg-vapour pressure and the luminous flux. Cold spot (cold chamber) of a T5 HE and HO (Energy saver and XT lamps included) is located on the lamp end with the etch (OSRAM marking). See 4.6.4, fig. 90. Optimum luminous flux for T5 is reached at a cold spot temperature from around 50 C, measured on lamp glass of the electrode etch side at an ambient lamp temperature of 35 C. Under these operation conditions the lamp will reach its nominal colour temperature with a tolerance± 200K. With increasing ambient lamp temperature in the lamp environment, the cold spot temperature and Hg-vapour pressure (higher quantity of Hg atoms released in the Hg vapour discharge) will increase and have as result that nominal luminous flux will start to decrease as well as the lamp power with result that colour temperature of the lamp will show a strong increase at maximum ambient lamp temperature of 80 C Luminous flux will decrease under those operation circumstances with ca. 40% at a maximum allowed cold spot temperature > 95 C. This reduction of luminous flux has also as influence a decrease in luminance (cd/cm²) of the T5 fluorescent lamp. If the phenomenon is reversed and the lamp operates under cold ambient lamp temperatures the lamp will perform a decrease in cold spot temperature and Hg-vapour pressure (lower quantity of Hg atoms released in the Hg vapour discharge). Under those conditions the electrical parameters of the lamp will change and produce a lower lamp power with as result a decrease of the luminous flux. At -10 C a T5 HE and HO (Energy saver and XT lamps included) fluorescent lamp its luminous flux will decrease at about 20% for a cold spot temperature of 10 C up to 15 C, measured on lamp glass of the electrode with the etch side of the lamp (at the glass rim nearby the lamp base). Colour temperature at this low ambient lamp temperature will show a minor decrease. Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE SLS and HO SLS 16mm LUMILUX : Mercury vapour pressure for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE SLS and HO SLS lamps is defined by the lamp its cold spot temperature and is in direct relation to the Hg-vapour pressure and the luminous flux. Cold spot of a T5 HE SLS and HO SLS is located at both ends of the upper glass tube not containing the electrodes. See: 4.8.1, fig Optimum luminous flux for is reached at a cold spot temperature from around 50 C, measured on lamp glass on one of both glass ends of the upper tube at an ambient lamp temperature of 35 C. Under these operation conditions the lamp will reach its nominal colour temperature with a tolerance± 200K. With increasing ambient lamp temperature in the lamp environment, cold spot temperature and Hg-vapour pressure (higher quantity of Hg atoms released in the Hg vapour discharge) will increase. As result a decrease in nominal luminous flux as well as in lamp power will take place. Also a strong colour temperature increase of the lamp at maximum ambient lamp temperature of 80 C will be the result. Luminous flux will decrease under those operation circumstances with ca. 40% at a maximum allowed cold spot temperature of > 95 C. This reduction of luminous flux has also as influence a decrease in luminance (cd/cm²) of the T5 HE SLS and HO SLS fluorescent lamp. If the phenomenon is reversed and the lamp operates under cold ambient lamp temperatures the lamp will perform a decrease in cold spot temperature and Hg-vapour pressure (lower quantity of Hg atoms released in the Hg vapour discharge)). Under those conditions the electrical parameters of the lamp will change and 150

152 produce a lower lamp power with as result a decrease in luminous flux. At -10 C a T5 HE SLS and HO SLS fluorescent lamp its luminous flux will decrease at about 20% for a cold spot temperature of 10 C up to 15 C, measured on one or both lamp glass ends of the upper glass tube of the lamp. Colour temperature at this low ambient lamp temperature will show a minor decrease. For T5 HE SLS and T5 HO SLS-lamps an arrangement in a line can lead to a creation of the cold spot in the middle of the lamp. This can lead to different colours of light as described above. To avoid this, suitable mechanical precautions should be chosen (e.g. transparent heat barriers). All those facts should make it better understandable for the OEM what the cause of origin is for colour temperature shift between the first lamp, the lamp in between, in the middle and the last lamp in closed and open environments as their cold spots will be heated at lower or higher temperatures because of accumulated ambient lamp temperature. Additionally to that the air in a closed environment will be set in movement by convection, what may start an air flow in the closed environment of the lamps accentuating lamp operation instability with as result a colour temperature shift for some lamps depending their location. 151

153 4.7 Dimming of single and double capped fluorescent lamps Important notes regarding the dimming of T5 HO CONSTANT, T5 FC LUMILUX, T8 LUMILUX and T5 HE, HE ES ENERGY SAVER, HE SLS SEAMLESS, HO, HO ES ENERGY SAVER, HO SLS SEAMLESS LUMILUX cold spot lamps: For optimum operation, new lamps should be aged for 100 hours at full output before they are dimmed for the first time. In installations in which the architect prescribe a single profile light band to produce a homogenous light or in a light cove in a ceiling, Master Slave combinations are communally used by the OEM to reduce the cost price of its lighting system. Under a Master Slave combination it should be understood, the second lamp in the slave lighting fitting is controlled from a twin lamp dimmable or non dimmable ECG installed in the first single lamp lighting fitting the Master lighting fitting. In that case the OEM will use a 4-core connecting cable with different cable lengths between the dimmable or non dimmable ECG and the lamps in the two single profile lighting fittings. Depending on the construction of the lighting fitting and the type of electronic circuit, this situation may lead to asymmetrical operation and malfunctions in one or both lighting fittings. The capacitive leakage currents leads to imbalance, different luminance and unstable operation for one or both lamps operated in dimmed state by the twin lamp dimmable ECG. For this reason Master-Slave operation for T8, T5 and T5 FC lamps is not recommended for two-lamp dimmable ECG. For more information see the Technical guides for ECG QUICKTRONIC technical guide Electronic control gear for fluorescent lamps and compact fluorescent lamps Master-slave circuit for two lamp luminaires Instructions about cable routing and Maximum recommended cable lengths must be observed. ECG for T5 fluorescent lamps technical guideline Electronic control gear to operatet5 diameter 16 mm fluorescent lamps $ 3.6 Master slave circuit and maximum length of the connecting cable between 2 lighting fittings, $ 7.1 Overview of maximum cable lengths. QUICTRONIC DALI/DIM technical guide Dimmable electronic control gear for fluorescent lamps Master-slave circuit. T5 HO CONSTANT lamps react more slowly than T5 HO cold spot lamps on variations in supplied electrical power or ambient temperature. For this reason it is strictly recommended not to mix the two types in an installation. After stabilisation, colour temperature differences can be visible between dimmed and undimmed lamps. When the lamps are dimmed to the lowest dimmer setting the colour temperature shift compared with undimmed lamps might initially be significant. After a stabilization period of 30 to 40 minutes (for CONSTANT lamps) or 20 to 30 minutes (for cold spot lamps) this difference is reduced to an absolute minimum again. Single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape T5 FC 22 W, 40 W and 55 W are dimmable with QUICKTRONIC Dimmable ECG Best Available Technology in a dimming range from 100 % down to 3 % luminous flux. Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 LUMILUX ES ENERGY SAVER are not released for dimming operation. Double capped fluorescent lamps T8 XT LUMILUX and T8 XXT LUMILUX are released for dimmable operation from 100 % to 25 % luminous flux. Double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE ES ENERGY SAVER and HO ES ENERGY SAVER are released for dimming operation with OSRAM QUICKTRONIC Dimmable ECG Best Available Technology. Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE SLS SEAMLESS and HO SLS SEAMLESS are released for dimming. T5 HO 39 W SLS and T5 HO 54 W SLS are dimmable with QUICKTRONIC QTi DIM DALI in a temperature range > 15 C for a luminous flux setting from 1 % up to 100 %. Exception: T5 HO 24 W SLS is not released for dimmable operation. 152

154 T5 HE 14 W SLS, HE 21 W SLS, HE 28W SLS are dimmable with QUICKTRONIC. QTi DIM DALI in a temperature range > 15 C for a luminous flux setting from 1 % up to 100 %. The technical requirements for dimming also apply to double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamps without restrictions. Note also that the chemical activity of the amalgam causes a delayed reaction of the lamp with regard to changes in power. This generally occurs with visible differences from one lamp to another. When T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamps are dimmed there may therefore be noticeable differences in brightness and colour perception between lamps of the same type, even if they are operated under identical conditions. The luminous flux of free-operating T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamps stabilises at 100 % after 15 to 30 minutes. In the case of T8 LUMILUX, T5 HE LUMILUX, T5 HO LUMILUX and T5 HE ES ENERGY SAVER LUMILUX,T5 HO ES ENERGY SAVER LUMILUX cold spot lamps the luminous flux stabilizes within 15 minutes. CONSTANT lamps can however be dimmed, with the restrictions mentioned above. For detailed information about T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT lamps in dimming operation in conjunction with OSRAM ECG BAT 1, see If the lamps are stored or switched off for a long period of time (> 20 hours) the mercury may migrate into the amalgam. At low dimmer settings and low ambient temperatures, there is then the possibility that the lamp will produce only very low light output (temporarily Hg-free stage, burning pink). This is caused by a too low lamp temperature and only low mercury vapour pressure present in the discharge (described in 4.3 Run-Up behaviour). The solution is to allow the lamp to operate for about 5 minutes at full output and then to dim it (no damage to the lamp). For optimum operation, new lamps should be aged for 100 hours at full output before they are dimmed for the first time. Why is a 100 h ageing period necessary? To meet the electrical and photometric requirements, all single capped and double capped fluorescent lamps have to be aged (operated) for 100 hours according to IEC (single capped fluorescent lamps) and IEC (double capped fluorescent lamps). This is necessary to stabilise lamp operation and get the emitter material on the electrodes into its final shape. Single and double capped fluorescent lamps operated with dimmable electronic control gear must always be stabilised at full (100 %) light output. Intermittent operation at full light output is acceptable to reach the 100 hours criteria. Avoiding operation of the lamps for 100 hours at full light output will result in flickering and premature blackening which finally yields reduced life of the lamps. 1. Recommendation for new installations: Usually in the construction phase at the building site, all lamps in the light fittings must be operated at full light output and NOT in dimmed mode. Under these conditions the electrodes will be stabilised at the time the lighting installation is provided (hand over). In particular in light ceilings or light fittings, in which single or double capped fluorescent lamps are not directly visible, stabilising the lamp for 100 h is an absolute advice. 2. Recommendation for the replacement of lamps in existing lighting installations: Single and double capped fluorescent lamps have long life span and are manufactured to tight tolerances. Dimming and non dimmed applications have the same life span (mortality) and same lumen maintenance of the lamps. We recommend bulk replacement and in dimmed application the replaced lamps must have been aged for 100 hours at full light output. 1) best available technology 153

155 In some installations with BMS (Building Master Control System) control, it may be difficult to age the lamps at 100 % light output. In such applications, we recommend that the lamps are aged separately in another location. This can be realised in an operating position, different from the final application. Some advance BMS control have an automatic detection when lamps are replaced that may allow stabilising of lamps by operating at full light output for 100 hours before dimming is applied. Conclusion: It is necessary to stabilise the lamps for 100 hours at full light output. Failure to do this will result in short lamp life. Scientific approach As mentioned above, there is the requirement that single and double capped fluorescent lamps shall be operated for a minimum of 100 h at rated lumen output, i.e. not dimmed, prior to any dimmed lamp operation. Consumers often ask whether this requirement is really necessary, why it is necessary and what would happen if there is no 100 h burn-in period at rated discharge current. The answer to this question lies in the chemical structure of the emitter material on the electrode coils of the low pressure discharge lamps. All electrode coils of low pressure discharge lamps from any brand are usually coated with a so called emission mix, which is a mixture of Barium- Strontium- and Calcium-Oxide. This mixture of oxides reduces the electron work function of the electrode. That means, the energy, which is required to drag current out of the electrode into the discharge of the lamp is reduced. The reduction is as high as about a factor of 2 to 3. Fig. 99: Picture of a T5 and a T8 electrode for low pressure discharge lamps, consisting of 2 lead wires and a tungsten electrode coil which is covered by (white) emitter. The issue with these oxides is that they are highly hygroscopic. This means, if they come into contact with air, they will suck up a lot of moisture which then is trapped inside of the lamp, leading to low light output, high lamp voltage and short lamp life. The trick, lamp manufacturer s use, is to put barium-, strontium- and calcium-carbonate on the electrodes instead of the oxides. The carbonates are stable when they are in contact with air. During the exhaust process of the lamp, when the air is pumped out of the lamp and the lamp is then filled with the designed fill gas, the electrodes which are covered with the carbonates are heated up to a temperature of 600 C and above. At that high temperature the carbonate changes into oxide by releasing CO 2 as shown in the equation. BaCO 3 + SrCO 3 + CaCO 3 BaO + SrO + CaO + 3CO 2 After this reaction is finished, another chemical reaction is necessary to reduce the electron work function of the electrode-emitter system, where atomic Barium is released and transported to the surface of the emitter. The reaction takes place at the surface of the tungsten wire, which the electrode is made of below the emitter coating and follows the equation. 6BaO + W Ba 3 WO 6 + 3Ba Once enough atomic Ba has reached the outer surface of the emitter, the electrode is ready for its work. This last reaction then continues over the whole life of the lamp and electrode. When the reaction is started for the first time in a new lamp, it will take a significant amount of time until the first coverage of Ba on the emitter surface is ready. This process needs a high emitter and coil temperature, 154

156 which usually is only given when the lamp operates at the rated discharge current with a hot spot on the electrode where a temperature of about 1900 K is reached. If the lamp is operated in a dimmed mode, the temperature on the coil is lower and got a wider distribution. Therefore the described process does not happen as effectively as in the operation at rated current. The consequence then is that the electrode is not in a proper shape and the electron work function is higher than with a properly conditioned electrode. This makes an increased temperature on the electrode necessary which is realized by an increased cathode fall voltage in front of the electrode. By this cathode fall voltage, ions from the plasma are accelerated to the electrode and yield an extra heating but also sputter material from the electrode, which causes destruction and therefore reduction of electrode and lamp life. It has to be mentioned that the reaction for the formation of Ba on the emitter surface as shown above needs to take place right at the beginning of lamp operation, i.e. in the first 100 h. Once the lamp has been operated some time in a dimmed mode without the 100 h burn-in period, the reaction will not happen in a proper way anymore, because the structure of the W BaO interface on the surface of the electrode under the emitter coating has changed. 155

157 4.8 Lamp temperature, safety and limit values All relevant information for safety requirements is available in following standards, IEC 61195, IEC and IEC Maximum temperatures for single and double capped fluorescent lamps Guidelines for safe lamp operation, lamps with G5 and G13 caps in accordance to the international standard IEC or EN Light fittings should be so designed that with the intended lamp installed in the light fitting, the lamp cap temperature on the lamp cap G5 and G13 under normal operation conditions does not exceed 120 C at the cap rim and at the insulator. For G13 capped lamps with a nominal wattage above 40 W, the maximum cap temperature should not exceed 140 C. Lamp Lampcaptemperature at cap rim and insulator in ( C) T8 up to 40 W 1)2)3) T8 58 W 1)2)3) T5 HE 14 up to 35 W 1)2) T5 HO 24 W up to 80 W 1)2)4) ) Also for ES Energy Saver lamps 2) Also for XT and XXT lamps 3) Also for XXT lamps 4) Also for CONSTANT Measurement conditions: Insulator material temperature in ( C) For measurement of the cap rim temperature, the hot junction of the thermocouple should be located on the cap shell at a distance not more than 2 mm from the cap-to glass junction. For the measurement of the insulator material temperature, the hot junction of the thermocouple should be located on the insulator part of the cap face along the line through the cap pins as near as possible to the centre between the contact pins. Specifications for the thermocouple wires: The thermocouple wires (diameter maximum of 0.2 mm each) should be insulated up to the place of attachment. Guidelines for safe lamp operation, lamps T5 FC all wattages with 2GX13 caps in accordance the international standard IEC or EN Light fittings for single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape T5 FC operated with HF electronic ballast (ECG) should be so designed that with the intended lamp installed in the light fitting, the lamp cap temperature on the lamp cap 2GX13 under normal operation conditions does not exceed the maximum temperature of 75 C. Measuring point location: The point where the temperature limit is given is on the centre point of the cap surface, which is equidistant from the two pairs of pins. Cap temperature rise In accordance to IEC 61195, and annexe D For lamps using caps G13 and designed for the use with a starter, the lamp cap temperature rise above ambient temperature shall not exceed 95 K. 156

158 Test for lamp cap temperature rise: The test shall be carried out under following test conditions: The circuit shall use the appropriate reference ballast, see IEC Supply voltage = 110 % of the rated voltage of the reference ballast with starter circuit continuously closed Test lamp without cathode emitter (deactivated) Test lamp, free burning, shall be suspended by means of nylon slings The plane through the cap pins shall be horizontal Draught free air Ambient temperature 25 C ± 5 C Electrical wiring to the lamp 1 mm² ± 5 % copper, attached to the pins For G13 caps, the thermocouple should be attached to the insulating material of the cap as close to the centre possible The test shall continue until a stable temperature is achieved Cap temperature rise In accordance to IEC For lamps T5 FC all wattages using caps 2GX13 and designed for HF electronic operation (ECG), the maximum lamp cap rise above ambient shall not exceed 50 K. The temperature rise shall be calculated from the temperature measured on the centre point of the cap surface, which is equidistant to the two pairs of pins. Compliance is checked in accordance with the relevant test specified in or of IEC Cold spot and amalgam temperatures It is important that in the light fitting the single or double capped fluorescent lamp operate under optimal thermal conditions so that the nominal electrical and photometric parameters for the lamp are respected. In that case optimum vapour pressure will be reached. A cold spot temperature increase or decrease will influence the electrical parameters and will result in an increase or decrease of the luminous flux. The cold spot measurement point (see Fig. 100) for a double capped fluorescent lamp 26 mm T8 lamp is located in the middle of the lamp on the glass wall. Optimum Hg vapour pressure is reached at about 20 C up to 25 C ambient temperature or 50 C glass wall temperature. 90 % of luminous flux is reached in an ambient temperature range from 10 C up to 30 C or a glass wall temperature from 40 C up to 60 C. Fig. 100: Cold spot measurement point on a T8 26 mm glass wall diameter The cold spot measurement point (see Fig. 101) for a double capped fluorescent lamp T5 HE and HO 16mm is located on the cap edge 1 mm away from the metal rim. Optimum Hg vapour pressure is reached at 35 C ambient temperature or 50 C glass wall temperature. 90 % of luminous flux is reached in an ambient temperature range from 25 C up to 50 C or a glass wall temperature from 40 C up to 65 C. 157

159 Fig. 101: Cold spot measurement point on a T5 HE and HO 16mm glass wall diameter Contrary to cold spot double capped fluorescent lamps, Hg vapour pressure is controlled by the amalgam vapour pressure in a CONSTANT double capped fluorescent lamp. In this case it is important to locate on the lamp a measurement point with the best correlation to the amalgam temperature. For double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO CONSTANT 16 mm lamp wall diameter 90 % of luminous flux is reached in an ambient temperature range from 5 C up to 70 C. This corresponds with a temperature measured on the glass near the amalgam location of approx. 57 C up to 110 C. The measurement point (see Fig. 102 and Fig. 103) for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HO CONSTANT 16 mm lamp wall diameter is located on the changeover lamp glass metal cap of the cap edge 1 mm away from the metal rim, 180 turned away from the etch. Fig. 102 and Fig. 103: Amalgam flag location best correlated measurement point T5 HO 16 mm CONSTANT, 180 turned away from the etch The cold spot of a single capped fluorescent lamp circular shape T5 FC 16 mm glass wall diameter is located on the longer exhaust tube (see Fig. 104) enclosed in the lamp cap 2GX13. We do not recommend OEM to open the lamp cap of the T5 FC lamp the risk to destroy the lamp is to important. We recommend the use of T5 FC lamps with mounted thermocouple available at request. Optimum Hg vapour pressure is reached at an exhaust tube temperature of 50 C. See Fig. 86, Fig. 87 and Fig. 88 to identify the ambient temperature range for a luminous flux value > 90 %. 158

160 Cold spot location Fig. 104: Cold spot measurement point (close up) on a T5 FC 16mm exhaust tube The Cold Spot of a T5 HE SEAMLESS and T5 HO SEAMLESS lamp is located at the upper end of the upper glass tube (the one not containing the electrode). Optimum Hg vapour pressure is reached at 30 C ambient temperature or 55 C glass wall temperature for T5 HE SEAMLESS and 75 C glass wall temperature for T5 HO SEAMLESS. Glass wall measuring point located in the middle of the glass tube of the lamp, but thermocouple must be applied on the under side of the glass tube 90 % of luminous flux is reached in an ambient temperature range from 22 C up to 43 C or a glass wall temperature from 45 C up to 65 C for T5 HE SEAMLESS. 90 % of luminous flux is reached in an ambient temperature range from 23 C up to 47 C or a glass wall temperature from 70 C up to 83 C for T5 HO SEAMLESS. Cold Spot Cold Spot Glass wall Cold Spot Fig. 105: Cold spot and glass wall temperature location for T5 HE SEAMLESS and T5 HO SEAMLESS 159

161 Summary: Measuring point cold spot location Measuring point near amalgam location Optimum Hg vapour pressure at C 90 % luminous flux in a temperature range Optimum Hg vapour pressure at C 90 % luminous flux in a temperature range Maximum temperature at cold spot T8 T5 HE and HO T5 HE SLS T5 HO SLS T5 FC T5 HO CONSTANT See Fig. 100 See Fig. 101 See Fig. 105 See Fig. 105 See Fig C ambient = 50 C glass wall 10 C up to 30 C ambient = 40 C up to 60 C glass wall 35 C ambient = 50 C glass wall 25 C up to 50 C ambient = 40 C up to 65 C glass wall 30 C ambient = 55 C glass wall 22 C up to 43 C ambient = 45 C up to 65 C glass wall 30 C ambient = 75 C glass wall 23 C up to 47 C ambient = 70 C up to 83 C glass wall C glass wall = > 50 % luminous flux loss 100 C glass wall = > 50 % luminous flux loss 100 C glass wall middle lamp = > 50 % luminous flux loss 100 C glass wall middle lamp = > 50 % luminous flux loss 30 C ambient = 50 C exhaust tube 20 C up to 45 C Ambient = 40 C up to 60 C exhaust tube 90 C exhaust tube = > 50 % luminous flux loss See Fig. 102 and Fig C up to 60 C ambient = 91 C up to 100 C glass wall cap rim 10 C up to 70 C ambient = 57 C up to 110 C glass wall cap rim - Maximum temperature lamp cap IEC measuring point Up to 40 W 120 C > 40 W 140 C All wattages 120 C All wattages 120 C All wattages 120 C All wattages 75 C All wattages 120 C 160

162 4.8.2 Maximum electrical safety values for single and double capped fluorescent lamps Electrical safety data for electronic operation to be observed (normal operation) Single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape as per IEC or EN Double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape as per IEC or EN SoS max maximal Sum Of Squares of the pin currents, defines the maximal permanent heating energy supplied to one electrode. Id max maximal permitted lamp current. Exceeding the maximal lamp current can lead to damage to lamp, lamp cap or lampholder. For lamps in high frequency operation, the pre-heat current must not be applied over a period of more than 10 sec. If a lamp does not start within this period, the current through the electrodes has to be reduced until the SoS value for the currents through the lead wires at each electrode stays below the Maximum SoS value as specified in table below. Also at end of lamp life the ballast has to prevent overheating by suitable measures. Safety data for electronic operation for 26 mm T8 double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape: Lamp Discharge current safety limit I Dmax (ma) SoS safety limit I LH max (ma) L 10 W L 15 W L 16 W L 18 W L 30 W L 36 W L 38 W L 58 W L 70 W UC UC L 18 W XT/XXT L 36 W XT/XXT L 58 W XT/XXT L 16 W ES UC UC L 32 W ES UC UC L 51 W ES UC UC UC = under consideration 161

163 Safety data for electronic operation for T5 HE and HO double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape: Lamp Discharge current safety limit SoS safety limit I Dmax I LH max (ma) (ma) HE 14 W HE 21 W HE 28 W HE 35 W HE 25 W ES HE 32 W ES HO 24 W HO 39 W HO 49 W HO 54 W HO 80 W HO 49 W XT HO 54 W XT HO 80 W XT HO 24 W CONSTANT HO 39 W CONSTANT HO 49 W CONSTANT HO 54 W CONSTANT HO 80 W CONSTANT HO 45 W ES HO 50 W ES HO 73 W ES Safety data for electronic operation for T5 SEAMLESS, HE SLS and HO SLS double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape: Lamp Discharge current safety limit I Dmax (ma) HE 14 W SLS HE 21 W SLS HE 28 W SLS HO 24 W SLS HO 39 W SLS HE 54 W SLS SoS safety limit I LH max (ma) Safety data for electronic operation for T5 FC single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape: Lamp Discharge current safety limit I Dmax (ma) SoS safety limit I LH max (ma) FC 22 W FC 40 W FC 55 W

164 Safety data for electronic operation for 16 mm T5 Short and T5 Short EL double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape: Lamp Discharge current safety limit I Dmax (ma) L 4 W L 6 W L 8 W L 13 W L 6 W EL L 8 W EL SoS safety limit I LH max (ma) 4.9 Striations Striations are local, periodic occurring dark zones in an elongated discharge. Those dark zones are non-stationary and excite often the impression a running striation. This phenomenon can already appear by means of least traces which are triggered in electronegative gasses. Extreme sensitively discharges reacts in intensely krypton containing gasses, especially at low ambient temperatures and under dimmed conditions (low settings). Also particular operation frequencies promote this effect, in this connection the case-by-case spreads are so important, that no suggestion for frequency ranges can be deducted. Very helpful is to age the lamps over a period of several hours and an accurate behaviour of the preheat current of the electrode. 163

165 5 Data for electronic gear manufacturers Single and double fluorescent lamps cannot be operated directly from the mains supply; they need a control gear. This take the form of an external unit connected between the lamp and the mains outlet. Generally spoken the state of the art is a preheated ECG for single and double capped fluorescent lamps, some ECG manufacturers also propose instant start ECG. In any case, the operating data of the control gear must be tailored to the lamp data. 5.1 Electronic operation The advantages of high-frequency operation are higher efficiency, longer lamp life, higher number of switching cycles and more comfortable light than it is the case with choke/starter circuits. To make best use of these advantages, however, it is important to ensure that the permissible operating data listed below for preheating, igniting and operating the lamps is followed. The values in the table apply to an operating frequency of 25 khz and a sinusoidal voltage during operation without starting aid Preheated (ECG operation) Starting lamps with filament preheating (preheated) is recommended by OSRAM as the standard starting procedure. In a preheated, the electrodes are heated by a preheating current with energy Q preheated to the emission temperature before the lamp is ignited. The necessary or permissible preheating current is determined by the design of the electrodes and the preheating time t preheated selected. Preheating times of less than 0.4 s are generally not permissible for single and double capped fluorescent lamps. This is because with such short times it is impossible to ensure sufficiently uniform heating along the entire length of the electrode. The minimum and maximum permitted preheating energy can be calculated using the parameters in the following table for various preheating times. Violating these limit values will cause blackening around the electrodes and shorter lamp life, particular if the lamp is switched on and off frequently. Compliance with the prescribed limits is tested on control gear using an equivalent resistor R sub which is connected to the control gear instead of the lamp electrodes. The energy fed into this resistor is measured over the selected preheating time. For the testing of the minimum limit Q preheated, min a substitution resistor R sub min is used. For the maximum limit (correspond with a higher electrode resistance) a substitution resistor R sub max is used. The minimum and maximum value of the preheated energy is calculated by Q preheated, min = Q + Pt preheated Q preheated, max = 2 x Q preheated, min If electrode preheated is carried out with a constant current I preheated or constant voltage U preheated the necessary current or voltage can be calculated as follows: 164

166 Preheating data for T8 26 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data, standardisation under consideration Lamp P (J/s) Q (J) R sub (Ω) min max min max min max L 10 W L 15 W L 16 W L 18 W L 30 W L 36 W L 38 W L 58 W L 70 W L 18 W XT/XXT L 36 W XT/XXT L 58 W XT/XXT L 16 W ES L 32 W ES L 51 W ES Preheating data for T5 HE and HO 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape in accordance to IEC 60081: Lamp P (J/s) Q (J) R sub (Ω) min max min max min max HE 14 W HE 21 W HE 28 W HE 35 W HE 25 W ES HE 32 W ES HO 24 W HO 39 W HO 49 W HO 54 W HO 80 W HO 49 W XT HO 54 W XT HO 80 W XT HO 24 W CONSTANT HO 39 W CONSTANT HO 49 W CONSTANT HO 54 W CONSTANT HO 80 W CONSTANT HO 45 W ES HO 50 W ES HO 73 W ES

167 Preheating data for T5 SEAMLESS HE SLS and HO SLS 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data Lamp P (J/s) Q (J) R sub (Ω) min max min max min max HE 14 W SLS HE 21 W SLS HE 28 W SLS HO 24 W SLS HO 39 W SLS HO 54 W SLS Preheating data for T5 FC 16 mm single capped fluorescent lamp circular shape in accordance to IEC 60901: Lamp P (J/s) Q (J) R sub (Ω) min max min max min max FC 22 W FC 40 W FC 55 W Preheating data for T5 Short and T5 Short EL 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data Lamp P (J/s) Q (J) R sub (Ω) min max min max min max L 4 W L 6 W L 8 W L 13 W L 6 W EL L 8 W EL

168 5.1.2 Starting (ECG operation) The lamp should not ignite during the preheating time; the open-circuit voltage of the ECG must therefore not exceed a lamp-specific maximum value. After the preheating phase the lamp should ignite reliably; the opencircuit voltage of the ECG must therefore not fall below a lamp-specific minimum value. The following table contains the permissible or necessary limit values for the open-circuit voltage of the ECG. Because of the temperature response of the ignition voltage of fluorescent lamps these values are given for two ambient temperature ranges. Starting data for T8 26 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data, standardisation under consideration Lamp Maximum open circuit voltage during preheating V rms Minimum open circuit voltage for ignition Ambient temperature +10 C L 10 W L 15 W L 16 W L 18 W L 30 W L 36 W L 38 W L 58 W L 70 W L 18 W XT/XXT L 36 W XT/XXT L 58 W XT/XXT L 16 W ES UC UC UC L 32 W ES UC UC UC L 51 W ES UC UC UC UC = under consideration V rms Minimum open circuit voltage for ignition Ambient temperature -15 C V rms 167

169 Starting data for T5 HE and HO 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape in accordance to IEC 60081: Lamp Maximum open circuit voltage during preheating V rms Minimum open circuit voltage for ignition Ambient temperature +10 C HE 14 W HE 21 W HE 28 W HE 35 W HE 25 W ES HE 32 W ES HO 24 W HO 39 W HO 49 W HO 54 W HO 80 W HO 49 W XT HO 54 W XT HO 80 W XT HO 24 W CONSTANT HO 39 W CONSTANT HO 49 W CONSTANT HO 54 W CONSTANT HO 80 W CONSTANT HO 45 W ES HO 50 W ES HO 73 W ES V rms Minimum open circuit voltage for ignition Ambient temperature -15 C V rms Starting data for T5 SEAMLESS HE SLS and HO SLS 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data, standardisation under consideration Lamp Maximum open circuit voltage during preheating V rms Minimum open circuit voltage for ignition Ambient temperature +10 C HE 14 W SLS HE 21 W SLS HE 28 W SLS HO 24 W SLS HO 39 W SLS HO 54 W SLS V rms Minimum open circuit voltage for ignition Ambient temperature -15 C V rms Starting data for T5 FC 16 mm single capped fluorescent lamp circular shape in accordance to IEC 60901: Lamp Maximum open circuit voltage during preheating V rms Minimum open circuit voltage for ignition Ambient temperature +10 C FC 22 W FC 40 W FC 55 W V rms Minimum open circuit voltage for ignition Ambient temperature -15 C V rms 168

170 Starting data for T5 Short and T5 Short EL 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data Lamp Maximum open circuit voltage during preheating V rms Minimum open circuit voltage for ignition Ambient temperature +10 C L 4 W L 6 W L 8 W L 13 W L 6 W EL L 8 W EL V rms Minimum open circuit voltage for ignition Ambient temperature -15 C V rms Operating data for undimmed lamps All the lamp data is specified only for operation at rated current. The lamp current may vary within the tolerance range without affecting lamp life. Detailed data are shown in the table below. In this range there is no need for constant heating current to maintain the electrodes at emission temperature. The critical load of a lamp is determined by two criteria: (1) the maximum lamp current and (2) the maximum current maximum in any lead. The lamp current is the current that goes through the discharge in the lamp. The current maximum in any lead is a limit value for the load capacity of the power supply leads if a heating current flows in addition to the lamp current. The current in any lead equals approximately the lamp current plus the heating current. Operating data for undimmed T8 26 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data, standardisation under consideration Minimum lamp current Maximum lamp current 1) Maximum current in any Lamp (undimmed) lead ma ma ma L 10 W L 15 W L 16 W L 18 W L 30 W L 36 W L 38 W L 58 W L 70 W L 18 W XT/XXT L 36 W XT/XXT L 58 W XT/XXT L 16 W ES L 32 W ES L 51 W ES

171 Operating data for undimmed T5 HE and HO 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Lamp Minimum lamp current Maximum lamp current 1) Maximum current in any (undimmed) lead ma ma ma HE 14 W HE 21 W HE 28 W HE 35 W HE 25 W ES HE 32 W ES HO 24 W HO 39 W HO 49 W HO 54 W HO 80 W HO 49 W XT HO 54 W XT HO 80 W XT HO 24 W CONSTANT HO 39 W CONSTANT HO 49 W CONSTANT HO 54 W CONSTANT HO 80 W CONSTANT HO 45 W ES HO 50 W ES HO 73 W ES This table complies with the latest edition of IEC and IEC ) Exceeding the maximum lamp current may shorten lamp life (overheating of the base) and a decrease in maintenance Operating data for undimmed T5 SEAMLESS HE SLS and HO SLS 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data, standardisation under consideration Lamp Minimum lamp current (undimmed) ma Maximum lamp current 1) ma Maximum current in any lead ma HE 14 W SLS HE 21 W SLS HE 28 W SLS HO 24 W SLS HO 39 W SLS HO 54 W SLS This table complies with the latest edition of IEC and IEC ) Exceeding the maximum lamp current may shorten lamp life (overheating of the base) and a decrease in maintenance Operating data for undimmed T5 FC 16 mm single capped fluorescent lamp circular shape: Lamp Minimum lamp current (undimmed) ma Maximum lamp current 1) ma Maximum current in any lead ma FC 22 W FC 40 W FC 55 W This table complies with the latest edition of IEC and IEC Exceeding the maximum lamp current may shorten lamp life (overheating of the base) and a decrease in maintenance 170

172 Operating data for undimmed T5 Short and T5 Short EL 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data Lamp Maximum lamp current 1) Minimum lamp current (undimmed) ma ma L 4 W L 6 W L 8 W L 13 W L 6 W EL L 8 W EL This table complies with the latest edition of IEC and IEC Exceeding the maximum lamp current may shorten lamp life (overheating of the base) and a decrease in maintenance Dimming Maximum current in any lead ma Reducing the lamp current below the minimum value specified in 5.3.1, can be used to reduce the luminous flux of the lamp appreciably below its rated value, thereby dimming the lamp. The dimming range is defined as the lamp current region between the minimum lamp current (undimmed) and the minimum lamp current in the table below. Please note the following: The lamp electrodes must be maintained at emission temperature by a continuous heating current The lamp voltage at lower discharge current is generally higher than the rated value The chromaticity coordinate of the light colour may deviate from its rated value In the interest of maximising lamp life, the auxiliary heating current must be matched to the lamp current. If the auxiliary heating current is too low, the lamp electrodes will very quickly be destroyed by sputtering. A constant heating current that is too high will result in excessive emitter evaporation which leads to end blackening. Fig. 106: Understanding dimming parameters Generally speaking, it is not easy to measure the continuous heating current when the lamp is being operated on an electronic control gear because of two reasons. First, the current is fed to the electrodes in the lamp via the two lead wires in a split that depends on the design of the control gear. Second, the lamp current and the auxiliary heating current may differ in phase, wave shape and frequency. Therefore it is not reasonable to specify the necessary auxiliary heating current as a function of the lamp current. The important variable for electrode heating is the electrical heating power Pheat fed to the electrode. As: or 171

173 The necessary auxiliary heating current can also be specified as a function of lamp current by indicating the total of: I + I 2 2 Pin 1 Pin 2 which is called the Sum of the Squares of the pin current (SoS) I Pin 1 and I Pin 2 are the two pin currents at an electrode in the lamp. I Pin 1 and I Pin 2 can be easily measured on electronic control gear. As the diagram above shows, there is an ideal target setting for the sum of the squares of the two pin currents at which the lamp life will be at its optimum. If the sum of the squares of the pin currents decreases, sputtering will occur at the electrodes. As a result, lamp life will be drastically reduced. If the sum of the squares of the pin currents increases with respect to the target value, end blackening gradually occurs and at very high values for heating the life of the lamp is gradually reduced due to high thermal evaporation of the emitter material. The data are shown in the table below: SoS Target = I 2 Pin 1 + I 2 Pin 2 Target = X 1 - Z *(Y 1 *I d ) SoS min = I 2 Pin 1 + I 2 Pin 2 min = X 1 - Y 1 * I d SoS max = I 2 Pin 1 + I 2 Pin 2 max = X 2 - Y 2 * I d Dimmable data for dimmed T8 26 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data, standardisation under consideration Lamp Minimum lamp current (A) Z Target () Y 1 (A) X 1 (A²) Y 2 (A) X 2 (A²) I LL max (A) I LH max (A) L 10 W L 15 W L 16 W L 18 W L 30 W L 36 W L 38 W L 58 W L 70 W L 18 W XT/XXT L 36 W XT/XXT L 58 W XT/XXT

174 Dimmable data for dimmed T5 HE and HO 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape in accordance to IEC 60081: Lamp Minimum Z Target Y 1 X 1 Y 2 X 2 I LL max I LH max lamp current (A) () (A) (A²) (A) (A²) (A) (A) HE 14 W HE 21 W HE 28 W HE 35 W HE 25 W ES HE 32 W ES HO 24 W HO 39 W HO 49 W HO 54 W HO 80 W HO 49 W XT HO 54 W XT HO 80 W XT HO 24 W CONSTANT HO 39 W CONSTANT HO 49 W CONSTANT HO 54 W CONSTANT HO 80 W CONSTANT HO 45 W ES HO 50 W ES HO 73 W ES Dimmable data for dimmed T5 SEAMLESS HE SLS and HO SLS 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data, standardisation under consideration Lamp Minimum lamp current (A) Z Target () Y 1 (A) X 1 (A²) Y 2 (A) X 2 (A²) I LL max (A) I LH max (A) HE 14 W SLS HE 21 W SLS HE 28 W SLS HO 39 W SLS HO 54 W SLS Dimmable data for dimmed T5 FC 16 mm single capped fluorescent lamp circular shape in accordance to IEC 60901: Lamp Minimum lamp current (A) Z Target () Y 1 (A) X 1 (A²) Y 2 (A) X 2 (A²) I LL max (A) I LH max (A) FC 22 W FC 40 W FC 55 W

175 Dimmable data for dimmed T5 Short and T5 Short EL 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Preliminary data Lamp Minimum Z Target Y 1 X 1 Y 2 X 2 I LL max I LH max lamp current (A) () (A) (A²) (A) (A²) (A) (A) L 4 W L 6 W L 8 W L 13 W L 6 W EL L 8 W EL The diagram Fig. 107 shows an example of a T5 Short lamp 0,05 0,04 SoS [A*A] 0,03 0,02 0, ,025 0,05 0,075 0,1 0,125 0,15 I discharge [A] SoS min SoS tar SoS max SoS 1 Pin SoS 2 Pin Fig. 107: The Id 1-pin and Id 2-pin lines in the diagram show the discharge current for a T5 Short for the two limiting cases 1. The discharge current of the lamp is fed only via one lead wire 2. The discharge current of the lamp is fed equally via the two lead wires The intersection of the curve with the line Id 1-pin with I 2 Pin 1 + I 2 Pin 2 min (= minimum) gives the value of the minimum discharge current below which heating must be provided. The optimum dimming operation would be along the target line. If there are any deviations toward smaller values for I 2 Pin 1 + I 2 Pin 2 the life of the lamp will be significantly reduced. If I 2 Pin 1 + I 2 Pin 2 is above the target value, blackening might be observed at the ends of the lamp. Proper lamp operation cannot take place below the Minimum line or above the Maximum line. Only burning duration tests can give a reliable indication of achievable lamp life in dimmer mode. These tests must be performed by the control gear manufacturers. Control gear manufacturers are also responsible for carrying out tests on the permissible ambient temperature ranges and on stability in dimmer mode. For optimum operation, new lamps should be aged for 100 hours at full output before they are dimmed for the first time. 174

176 5.2 Magnetic operation Magnetic operation 220/230 V, 50 Hz The following table shows the data for magnetic control gear for T8 26 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Lamp Preheated Ignition 175 Impedance 1) Rated preheated current Preheating current Substitute Resistance 2) Open circuit voltage (Ω) (ma) Min (ma) Max (ma) (Ω) Min Vrms Max Vpeak L 10 W No standard L 15 W L 16 W No standard L 18 W L 23 W No standard L 30 W L 36 W L 36 W-1 No standard L 38 W L 58 W L 70 W L 18 W XT/XXT L 36 W XT/XXT L 58 W XT/XXT L 16 W ES L 32 W ES L 51 W ES For the calibration current of the reference control gear (see 2.2.2) Tolerance ± 3% 2. Substitution resistance of both electrodes connected in series Single capped fluorescent lamp circular shape T5 FC and double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO ES, HO XT, HO CONSTANT are not released for operation with magnetic control gear and starter (glow or electronic starters). Electrical data for lamp and ballast is not specified in the concerned international standards. This kind of operation is not supported by OSRAM. The following table shows the data for magnetic control gear for T5 Short and T5 Short EL 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Lamp Preheated Ignition Impedance 1) Rated preheated current Preheating current Substitute Resistance 2) Open circuit voltage (Ω) (ma) Min (ma) Max (ma) (Ω) Min Vrms Max Vpeak L 4 W L 6 W L 8 W L 13 W L 6 W EL L 8 W EL For the calibration current of the reference control gear (see 2.2.2) Tolerance ± 3% 2. Substitution resistance of both electrodes connected in series

177 5.3 Electrical data for the filaments The electrode or filament is an extremely important component of a fluorescent lamp. To operate the lamp at its optimum it is essential for the filament to be maintained within a particular temperature range. To ensure that this is the case even if a control gear is operated with lamps from different manufacturers, the filament data are standardised Relationship (ratio) between the hot resistance of the filament and the cold resistance The value of the resistance of the filament increases with increasing temperature. From this relationship (ratio) between the resistance value (R h ) from the hot filament (at 25 C ambient temperature) to the resistance value (R c ) of the cold filament (shortly before ignition of the lamp) is it possible to conclude on the filament temperature. See Fig Fig. 108: Relationship of resistance in relation to the filament temperature. Depending on the switching concept the ratio from R h to R c should be located between 4 and 6 respectively between 4 and 8 7) Source: C.H. Sturm/E. Klein Betriebsgeräte und Schaltungen für elektrische Lampen Elektrodenwendeln 176

178 5.3.2 Energy model In this model out of the variables: filament current during the preheating, filament voltage and preheating time, the energy which is transformed in the filament during preheating is calculated. In the lamp standards minimum and maximum energy values are specified, in which the measured energy value is compared. A filament is preheated optimally when the measured energy values are located inside the specified limits. See Fig Fig. 109: Schematic illustration of the energy required for preheated and starting Source: IEC ) All relevant IEC or EN standards for lamps, CCG, ECG, luminaires and others. The filament of a single capped fluorescent lamp circular shape T5 FC or a double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape T8 or T5 HE and HO is defined such that the warm resistance RT specified in the following table is in equilibrium when the specified test current flows through the filament. The cold resistance is not standardised and is shown here for the purposes of completeness only. Electrical data for filaments of 26 mm T8 double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape: Preliminary data, standardisation under consideration Lamp Test current IT (ma) Warm resistance R h at IT (Ω) Cold resistance R c measured at the pins (Ω) L 10 W L 15 W L 16 W L 18 W L 30 W L 36 W L 38 W L 58 W L 70 W UC UC UC L 18 W XT/XXT L 36 W XT/XXT L 58 W XT/XXT L 16 W ES L 32 W ES L 51 W ES UC = under consideration 177

179 Electrical data for filaments of T5 HE and HO 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Lamp Test current Warm resistance Cold resistance IT R h at IT R c measured at the pins (ma) (Ω) (Ω) HE 14 W HE 21 W HE 28 W HE 35 W HE 25 W ES HE 32 W ES HO 24 W HO 39 W HO 49 W HO 54 W HO 80 W HO 49 W XT HO 54 W XT HO 80 W XT HO 24 W CONSTANT HO 39 W CONSTANT HO 49 W CONSTANT HO 54 W CONSTANT HO 80 W CONSTANT HO 45 W ES HO 50 W ES HO 73 W ES Electrical data for filaments of T5 HE SLS and HO SLS 16 mm double capped fluorescent lamp linear shape: Lamp Test current IT (ma) Warm resistance R h at IT (Ω) Cold resistance R c measured at the pins (Ω) HE 14 W SLS HE 21 W SLS HE 28 W SLS HO 24 W SLS HO 39 W SLS HO 54 W SLS Electrical data for filaments of T5 FC 16 mm single capped fluorescent lamp circular shape: Lamp Test current IT (ma) Warm resistance R h at IT (Ω) Cold resistance R c measured at the pins (Ω) FC 22 W FC 40 W FC 55 W Electrical data for filaments of T5 Short and T5 Short EL double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape: Lamp Test current IT (ma) Warm resistance Rh at IT (Ω) Cold resistance Rc measured at the pins (Ω) L 4 W L 6 W L 8 W L 13 W L 6 W EL L 8 W EL

180 6 Light fitting design, reflectors and accessories 6.1 Caps, lampholders and wiring Lampholders for single or double capped fluorescent lamps have a dual role to supply power to the lamp and hold the lamp in position. They must also be able to withstand high temperatures, mechanical stress and UV radiation. The quality of the lampholder is therefore an important aspect. Another factor to bear in mind is that the lampholder must be strong enough to withstand the stresses involved in removing old lamps and inserting new lamps several times during the lifetime of the light fitting. Good contact between the lamp cap pins and the lamp cap contact must be guaranteed under any condition. Lamp caps and holders together with gauges for control of interchangeability and safety are specified in the International standards: IEC part 1: lamp caps IEC part 2: lampholders IEC part 3: gauges IEC part 4: guidelines and general information IEC60400 Leading lampholder manufacturers are offering a complete product family for G13, G5, 2GX13 push-trough, push-in, end-fixing and surface-mounted lampholders. 8)9)10) See Bibliography Pay attention to the voltage value U-OUT printed on the ECG housing for the right choice of the G5 lampholder and when wiring light fittings for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE or HO 16 mm. The value informs you about the possible cable or wire type to use. For voltages greater than 430 V, cables or wires with the classification H07 have to be used. U-OUT is the maximum voltage that can occur between the lamp terminals or the lamp terminal and the earth connector. All OSRAM QUICKTRONIC ECG for operation with double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE and HO 16 mm, U-OUT is less than 430 V allowing light fittings to be wired with cables or wires H05. For this reason it is also important to know that lampholders (250 V rated version) developed for existing T5 Short 16 mm 4 W, 6W, 8 W, 13 W are not released to operated with T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO ES, HO CONSTANT, HO XT double capped fluorescent lamps. All leading lampholder manufacturers are offering especially developed lampholders with rotor for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO ES, HO CONSTANT, HO XT 16 mm. For safety reasons only those 500 V marked lampholders (voltages up to 500 V towards earth are allowed) are suitable to be used in T5 light fittings. Special G5 lampholder for T5 HE and HO SEAMLESS double capped fluorescent lamps, have been developed by leading lampholder manufacturers in order to enable the needed special orientation of SEAMLESS-lamps (also lampholders 500 V rated versions). GX5 lampholders are not suited for operation with T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO ES, HO CONSTANT, HO XT double capped fluorescent lamps as the pins from those lamps are round. GX5 lampholders are developed for the T5 VHO range which has flattened contact pins. All leading lampholder manufacturers are offering especially developed lampholders for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T8 26 mm. For safety reasons those lampholders 250 V (voltages up to 250 V towards earth are allowed) are suitable to be used in T8 light fittings. 179

181 6.2 Lamp supports Light fitting manufacturers are often challenged to mount double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T8 or T5 or single capped fluorescent lamps circular shape T5 FC, so that they have to be supported by lamp supports in form of a clip in the light fitting. These clips have to be made out of a synthetic and insulating material that is UV and heat resistant. Those kinds of clips are proposed by leading lampholder manufacturers. Metal clips or a metal spring clip are not allowed or released for the support of the lamp, their use may lead to: Incorrect thermal behaviour of the double capped fluorescent lamp T8 and T5 as well as for single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC. An artificial cold spot is created on the lamp glass wall by the contact between the metal clip, the light fitting housing and lamp. Under those conditions Hg will condensate and create black ring around the fixation. Optimum luminous flux will not be achieved under this condition. See Fig Early lamp failure caused by the condensation of Hg near the metal clip in case of dimming operation Instable operation of the lamps T8, T5 and T5 FC in dimmable operation, produced by capacitive coupling Ignition issue in form of an early ignition (wrong preheating) created by the metal clip which act as starting aid Direct touching metal parts can also lead to acoustic emissions like humming, whistling Differences in colour temperatures are possible between the different lamps Fig. 110: Artificial cold spot (black ring) created on the lamp glass wall by the contact between the metal clip, the light fitting housing and lamp The advised distance between the lamp glass wall and all metal grounded parts in a light fitting is minimum 6 mm (see IEC and IEC 60901), for all types of fluorescent lamps T8, T5 and T5 FC. For T5 HE and HO SEAMLESS lamps a minimum distance between the lamp glass wall and all grounded metal parts of the light fitting of 10 mm is advised. This is recommended to prevent that parallel current or capacitive current is coupled in the grounded metal parts of the light fitting. If for construction reasons the manufacturer of the light fitting is not able to respect the minimum recommended distance between grounded metal parts of the light fitting and the lamp glass wall, it can t be excluded that local blackening appears as well as a non stable operation of the lamp. This is valid for 100 % operation or dimmable operation at a lower setting. Fig 111: Metal reflector or grounded metal parts of the light fitting touch the glass of the lamp. 180

182 Maximum weight of the fluorescent lamp and its attachment 200 g for fluorescent lamps with a lamp cap G5 500 g for fluorescent lamps with a lamp cap G13 For further information about attachment to lamps: Consult the international standard IEC or EN Luminaires -1; Part 1 General requirements and tests Attachments to lamps. 181

183 6.3 Distances between double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape In a light fitting an optimal distance of 32 mm between the lamp glass walls of two or more T5 linear fluorescent lamps is recommended. If the distance is reduced, then the OEM has to be conscientious that the electrical and photometric parameters of the lamps will change. See IEC or EN double capped fluorescent lamps performance specifications) IEC or EN Maximum lamp cap temperature of 120 C must not be exceeded! Optimum 32 mm Optimum 32 mm Fig. 112: Optimum distance between two T5 HE or HO lamps in horizontal and vertical operation position A distance of 32 mm is recommended between both lamps for an optimum operation of all T5 HE and HO types. This is the space between 2 lamps and their outer diameter of the lamp glass. Only under these conditions the lamps will operate and produce their optimum light flux and electrical parameters (in accordance to the standard EN60081 or IEC "performance requirements for double capped fluorescent lamps"). It can be understood that a light fitting manufacturer may be forced by architects, customers, designers etc. to reduce the distance between both lamps in a light fitting to achieve a more compact design. This decision is made by the light fitting manufacturer to produce a product that meets the requirements of his customer. In the worst of cases, when a distance too close is chosen between two lamps, this may lead to a decrease in average life time of the lamp. If an OEM decides to produce a light fitting with a space below 32 mm between the outer glass wall diameter of each lamp, then that s his own decision, and he is responsible for its product. He has to produce a light fitting that meets the standard EN60598 or IEC60598 general requirements for luminaries, to get the ENEC label for its light fitting. In annexe D of that standard, it s mentioned that the lamp performance requirements also have to be met. What happens with the performance data of the lamp? If an acceptable distance smaller than 32 mm is chosen by the light fitting manufacturer between two lamps in a light fitting, then the OEM must be aware that the operation temperature of the lamps will increase. This results in higher cold spot temperatures and leads to a higher mercury vapour pressure, see Fig. 4 and This fact brings changes in the electrical values of the lamps; performance is modified, lamp power and luminous flux will decrease. If for example 90 C (see horse shoe curve of the related T5 lamp) is reached on the cold spot, then the light flux will decrease by more than 30 % from the maximum value of the flux. Lamp power will be reduced by ca. 25 %. The minimum space between two lamp glass diameters have to be chosen by the OEM in such a 182

184 way that the performance requirements for the lamps are met in accordance to the standard EN or IEC When too high cold spot temperatures are reached, a decrease of light flux and lamp power can't be avoided, due to the fact that the lamps are too close to each other. As a result, this can also lead to a non proper operation of the electronic ballast with destruction or reduced of life time of the lamps. It can t be excluded that the lamp glass gets hot; as a result of this the lamp will bend in the light fitting. The minimum distance for an acceptable performance of the lamps is also related to the volume and design of the light fitting; in most cases 16 mm are too close. For the best light fitting design the distance between double capped fluorescent lamps or single capped fluorescent lamps to grounded metal parts of the light fitting, e.g. reflectors should be observed. We suggest following minimal distances to metal parts: fluorescent lamps T5 and T8: 6 mm single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC: 6 mm Fluorescent lamps T5 HE SLS and T5 HO SLS: 10 mm If these minimal distances are not observed, problems could occur such as: bad ignition induced noises esp. in deep dimming settings flickering of light extinguishing of the lamps non uniform light distribution in the lamp created by capacitive coupling (leakage current) Issues can also be influenced by the light fitting, its construction (geometry, used materials and so on) and surrounding temperatures all of which in addition can influence lamp performance, the system and the light fitting itself. Please take into account, that metal reflectors should always be well grounded. These suggestions are strict. If the OEM decides to reduce the distance between the external outer lamp glass diameter and reflector compared to the recommendations, this is not supported by our company, as many external influences may have a negative impact on the performance of the lamps and the light fitting and its behaviour in general. The OEM always bears the responsibility that his design and construction will work properly and that the lamps will operate within the specifications. When two or more T5 HE SEAMLESS or T5 HO SEAMLESS lamps are mounted in line in an open or a closed light fitting then a minimum distance of 5 mm must be respected between the lamp glass ends of the cold spot of each lamp. See Fig This is to avoid that the cold spots of the lamps are heating up each other. Fig. 113: Minimum distance between the lamp glass ends of the cold spots from 2 or more T5 HE and HO SEAMLESS that are mounted in line in an open or closed light fitting or a metal mounting plate 10 mm distance between the lamp glass and all metal grounded parts (e.g. housing, reflector). See 4.2 Starting at low temperatures and 6.2 Lamp supports. 183

185 6.4 Operation position of double capped fluorescent lamps The optimum luminous flux of double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 26 mm T8 is reached at ca 20 C up to 25 C ambient temperature in horizontal operation position and draught free air. As the cold spot for this lamps is located nearly in the middle of the glass tube and both electrodes are mounted on the same distance in the lamp tube, no special requirement about lamp etch facing down or up in vertical operation position is necessary. Avoid that a cold air (lamps mounted in the neighbourhood of air conditioning) is directed to the lamp glass in any operation condition. If a flow of cold air hits the lamp glass, temperature on the lamp glass will decrease and has a decrease in luminous flux as result. Under extreme conditions (direct air stream that hits the lamp) it may be possible that the T8 or T5 fluorescent lamp will stay in a pink colour and never reach its light colour or luminous flux. The optimum luminous flux from double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 16 mm T5 HE SEAMLESS and T5 HO SEAMLESS is reached at ca 30 C ambient temperature or 45 C (T5 HE SLS) respectively 47 C (T5 HO SLS) cold spot temperature on the lamp glass wall end in horizontal operation position and draught free air. The optimum luminous flux from double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape 16 mm T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO ES, HO XT is reached at ca 35 C ambient temperature or 49 C cold spot temperature on the lamp glass wall in horizontal operation position and draught free air. The cold spot of the lamp is located at the etch (stamp) side to avoid that the lamps operate under unstable conditions in a twin or multi lamp light fitting. It s recommended that all installed lamps face each other their etch side (Stamp) under any operation position. For stabilisation of the electric and photometric parameters, vertical operation position of the T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO CONSTANT, HO ES, HO XT 16 mm lamps, lamp etches facing down is recommended over the aging period of 100 h. For stabilisation of the electric and photometric parameters, horizontal operation position of the T5 HE SEAMLES and T5 HO SEAMLESS is recommended over the aging period of 100 h. For stabilisation of the electric and photometric parameters, horizontal operation position of the T5 Short and T5 EL Short is recommended over the aging period of 100 h. Under normal or warm ambient temperatures, T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO CONSTANT, HO ES,HO XT 16 mm lamps operated in vertical operation all the lamps must face with their etch (stamp) down. If more than one T5 HE SEAMLESS or T5 HO SEAMLESS lamp is operated in line, in a closed light fitting in vertical operation position differences in brightness (which appear for the human eye as a difference in colour temperature) can t be avoided. These differences are produced by a different cold spot temperature of the second lamp in line that is heated up by the dissipated heat of the first lamp under it. The same will happen for the third lamp and so one up to the last lamp in line which is mounted on the highest location in the closed light fitting. Under those conditions it can be useful to consider the use of a complementary reflector (additional heating) which is put over the lamp glass in the region of the cold spot of the first lamp. The OEM should additionally consider eventually using smaller reflectors put over flat glass of the tube from the cold spot. If T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO CONSTANT, HO ES,HO XT 16mm lamps are operated in a light fitting in vertical operation position at a very low ambient temperature outside, then it s recommended that all the lamps must face up with their etch side (stamp). Under those conditions the CONSTANT lamp its amalgam and the other types their cold spot can be heated up so that maximum luminous flux can be produced rapidly. In some cases lighting manufacturers are offering for a better luminous performance of T5 HE, HE ES, HO, HO ES, HO XT in their light fitting at cold ambient temperatures a metal tube (heat cap) that is glided over the cold spot of the lamp. This metal part will heat up the temperature of the cold spot and can influence light fitting efficiency. Nevertheless better results are achieved at cold ambient temperatures with T5 HO CONSTANT lamps. 184

186 6.5 Twin lampholders All relevant lampholder manufacturers are offering twin mounted lampholders for double capped fluorescent lamps T5 16 mm with a relative small distance to each lamp. This construction offers the OEM the opportunity to build two lamps in a light fitting with a relative tight volume. Even when both lamps are installed with their etch side (stamp) facing each other it can t be avoided that the cold spot of both lamps is operated at a too high operation temperature. This results in a drop of luminous flux, lamp power and system power. 6.6 Magnetic ballast for double capped fluorescent lamps 26 mm T8 The European commission decided by Regulation 245/2009 respectively Regulation 347/201, that the third step come into application in 2017, from that time on in the European Union, it's forbidden to bring light fittings with magnetic control gear EEI class B1 and B2 into the market. Only energy related products can then be released for the market like prescribed in the Regulation 245/2009 respectively Regulation 347/2010. For further question please consult the website of the relevant manufacturers of magnetic control gear. Double capped fluorescent lamps all T5 HE and HO are not standardised for operation with magnetic control gear, OSRAM will not support this mode of operation for its product range of T5 fluorescent lamps. 6.7 Electronic control gear All necessary information for the OEM about OSRAM electronic control gear - dimmable and non dimmable ECG as well as LMS (Light Management Systems) is available in the technical guides that are accessible on our website Starters All necessary information for the OEM about OSRAM starters for double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape T8 and T5 Short is available in the technical guide Starters, which is accessible on our website In attachment 1: See overview which starter for which lamp is available. 6.9 Reflectors A reflector is one of the most important parts in a light fitting to direct the produced light of the lamp out of the light fitting under a certain requested angle and with a minimum of glare. The reflector system directs the radiation of the light source on the necessary area, or on the necessary working place. Possible applications or working places are for example offices, flours, walls, shops, warehouses. Dependent of the application or the working place and in order to provide a maximum light comfort for example for offices, the glare is controlled through grids (lamellas). The complete reflector system is called in that version a symmetrical louver system. For other applications like for the illumination of walls the reflector has an asymmetrical shape. The choice of the reflection surface should be made out of a material with the highest reflectivity. Reflectivity (ρ) is the fraction of incident radiation reflected by a surface. In general it must be treated as a directional property that is a function of the reflected direction, the incident direction, and the incident wavelength. 185

187 The light radiation falling on a material can be reflected directed, scattered or mixed. Reflectivity is mostly stated for diffuse light incidence (ρ DIFF ) or virtual parallel diffuse light under 8 (ρ). In illumination engineering mostly (ρ DIFF ) is standard. 12) For more information consult:lange, Handbuch der Beleuchtung, Reflektoren ρ and ρ DIFF can reach in theory the value 1 (100 %). See Fig. 114 and Fig Fig. 114 by courtesy of Jordan Reflektoren GmbH Fig. 115: by courtesy of Jordan Reflektoren GmbH Mirror reflectors nowadays are solely manufactured in polished and anodized aluminium. The surface can be created from mirror-bright to matt or moulded without form. On the supporting material a mirror- or an anticorrosion coating is applied. Newest development conducted to the application of vapour coating of interference layers applied over the mirror layer so that a reflectivity of 98 % and the highest optical light output ratio is created (e.g. MIRO Silver - Mirror material developed by Alanod). The Alanod Miro Materials are delivered as ready finished reflector material on coils. Possible reflector design: Fig. 116: Reflector symmetric shape principle Fig. 117: Reflector asymmetric shape principle Fig. 118: Evolute shape principle It should be avoided in installations to mix light fittings from different manufacturers as they may use different reflector quality. Under those conditions it can t be avoided that difference in light colour, illuminance and even iridescence may appear. Distinction between a T5 reflector system and a T8 reflector system By courtesy of Jordan Reflektoren GmbH In ideal case every ray is only disengaged with one reflection out of the grid. However there are also rays, which are reflected by the reflector back to the lamp and from there they are reflected again in the direction of the reflector, whereat every reflection creates losses. That s why it is important to use a material with high reflectivity like Alanod Miro Silver (98 % total reflection) in order to reach best possible light out ratio [η]. Best for the light fitting light output ratio in order to avoid multiple reflections is to use a relatively big reflector in relation to the light source. However the market desires always more tight grid systems caused as well through the miniaturisation of the light sources (e.g. Jordan T5-Mini-Grid system see annexe 5). Thereby proportion between the reflector and lamp reduce itself, whereby more multiple reflections are produced and thereby the result is that the optical light output ratio from the light fitting η decrease. Resulting out of these relationships it arises to, that for the design of an efficient grid system the use from as possible compact light sources is required. Generally there are no essential photometric differences between T5 and T8 double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape as long as similar proportions between reflector size and light source are scheduled. Under those conditions photometric results for T5 and T8 double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape are matchable. If 186

188 however T5 grids in tight construction are operated with T8 double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape than of course the result of the system will be a worse optical light output ratio η from the light fitting. In most of all cases the reverse is more frequent. T8 light fittings systems are converted with T5 double capped fluorescent lamps. If the light fitting as system is big enough (mostly the case for T8 light fittings) there is a noticeable improvement in light output ratio η when using in the same system the more compact T5 light source. While the efficiency of the fluorescent lamps self have to be comparable, the result for the possible optical output ratio for T5 double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape after light fitting measurement will be in anyway superior on ground of the measurement standard. See Fig. 119 and Fig The measurement in question, formulate in simple words, that for T5 double capped fluorescent lamps linear shape the luminous flux in the integrating sphere is measured at 25 C ambient temperature and also after measurement so is deposited in the protocol. In the light fitting higher temperature of the lamp over its operation are reached (e.g. ideal case 35 C) and a higher luminous flux is reached under those operation conditions. This discrepancy can make a difference of up to approximately 20 %, is positively reflected back in the optical output ratio η of the light fitting. Therefore that optical output ratio of the light fitting η from over 100 % is possible. In accordance to the international standard for T5 fluorescent lamps this is absolutely correct. For this reason often also the measurement results for larger systems for T5 fluorescent lamps may appear more positive than for T8 fluorescent lamps. Fig. 119: Light ray simulation in a T8 reflector by courtesy of JordanFig. 120: Light ray simulation in a T5 reflector by courtesy of Jordan Reflektoren Reflektoren GmbH GmbH 187

189 7 Measuring single and double capped fluorescent lamps Single capped fluorescent lamps differ, in some cases quite considerably, from double capped fluorescent lamps in terms of their technical characteristics. In measurements, therefore, particular attention should be paid to the following (see also IEC and IEC 60081): 3. Defined ageing (operated at 100 % lamp power) of the lamp (100 hours) 4. Adequate burn-in time (stabilization) before measurements are taken (24 hours, and see measurement steps under 0, p. 188) 5. Constant Ta (ambient temperature) during the measurements (25 C ± 1 C) 6. No destabilization due to mechanical vibrations, even when switched off 7. High crest factor resolution for measurement equipment (true rms instruments) 8. Short mains supply and measurement instrument wiring to the lamp (for ECG operation) If these conditions are met, single and double capped fluorescent lamps display good reproducibility of electrical and photometric values. Reference lamps measured under the following conditions can be obtained from OSRAM (see 7.6). 7.1 Ageing of lamps Before photometric data is gathered, new lamps should be aged (operated at 100 % lamp power) for 100 hours. During shipping and normal handling of the lamps, e.g. rotating of the lamp, any excess amount of mercury may be distributed in small droplets within the discharge tube. Proper conditioning is reached when all the excess mercury has been collected at the coldest spot in the tube. Experience has shown that initially this process of lamp conditioning may take up to 24 h. When a lamp, once has passed this conditioning period, then it is ready for measurement. For conditioning and warming up the lamp may be operated in a location, distant to the test location. When moving to the test location, provided that the lamp has been kept in the same position and not subjected to vibration or shock and no warm glass parts are touched (i.e. creating a parasitic cold spot). Before moving an amalgam lamp to the test location let the lamp cool down for 1 min in the burning position. A stabilisation period of minutes (see table) is necessary in the test location. To avoid cooling down of warm glass parts during moving the lamp to test location thermally insulating gloves or similar technique shall be used. The interruption of the supply should be as short as possible. Measurement of light output and lamp operating voltage must be taken at least once per minute. During the final 5 minutes of stabilisation time, the difference of maximum and minimum readings of light output and lamp operating voltage shall be less than 1 % of the average of the readings. If this is not feasible, the real fluctuation shall be stated. 188

190 7.2 Operating position Aging 100 h, single capped and double capped fluorescence lamps Lamp type Operation position Remarks T8 LUMILUX, LUMILUX de luxe, Horizontal operating position special colours T8 LUMILUX ES Horizontal operating position T5 HE, T5 HE ES Vertical operating position Etch side (stamp) facing down T5 HO, T5 HO ES, T5 HO XT, Vertical operating position Etch side (stamp) facing down T5 HO CONSTANT Vertical operating position Etch side (stamp) facing down T5 FC T5 HE SLS, T5 HO SLS, T5 Short, T5 EL Short Horizontal operating position, IEC Horizontal operating position Procedure for stabilization of a double capped fluorescent lamp linear shapet8 cold spot: Age the lamps for 100 h in a horizontal operating position with a classic control gear (CCG, magnetic ballast) or an electronic control gear, ECG specially designed for the lamp. This ensures that the liquid mercury will migrate and condensate at the cold spot located in the middle of the glass tube from the lamp. Stabilisation has to be realised within a room temperature range of 25 C ± 1 C Procedure for stabilization of a double capped fluorescent lamp linear shapet5 cold spot and CONSTANT: Age the lamps for 100 h in a vertical operating position (cold spot/ etch side or CONSTANT etch side facing down) with an ECG specially designed for the lamp. This ensures that the liquid mercury will migrate and condensate at the cold spot located at the etch side (stamp) of the lamp. Stabilisation has to be realised within a room temperature range of 25 C ± 1 C Procedure for stabilization of a single capped fluorescent lamp circular shape T5 FC cold spot: Age the lamps for 100 h in a horizontal operating position with an ECG specially designed for the lamp. This ensures that the liquid mercury will migrate and condensate at the cold spot located at the etch side (stamp) of the lamp. Stabilisation has to be realised within a room temperature range of 25 C ± 1 C. Procedure for stabilization of a double capped fluorescent lamp linear shapet5 HE SLS, T5 HO SLS, T5 Short, T5 EL Short cold spot. Age the lamps for 100 h in a horizontal operating position with an ECG specially designed for the lamp or a CCG in the case of T5 Short and T5 EL Short. This ensures that the liquid mercury will migrate and condensate at the cold spot of the lamp. Stabilisation has to be realised within a room temperature range of 25 C ± 1 C. 189

191 7.3 Photometric values Aged and stabilised single and double capped fluorescent lamps provide reproducible photometric data at constant ambient temperature and in an unchanged operating position. Fluctuations are less than 1 % of the upper range value. Transport of stabilized double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE and HO for measurement: The 100 h aged, T5 lamps must be transported to the measurement point in the laboratory in a vertical position (etch side, facing down) in a vibration free manner. The lamps should be aged for 30 minutes in the goniometer before measurement in a horizontal or vertical operating position. Repeat this procedure afterwards for lamps that will be measured in the goniometer in a light fitting. In case of a twin lamp light fitting both etch side of the lamp should face each other. Measurements should be executed immediately after the pre-burning period of 30 minutes. The lamp may be switched-off for maximum 30 minutes. When mounting the lamp horizontally in the goniometer or in the light fitting that is mounted in the goniometer, it must be ensured that this is realised without any disturbance to the lamp and ensure that the cold spot remains the lowest point of the lamp. If the lamp is switched-off for more than 30 minutes, then it has to stabilize for an additional 20 hours. Measurement of the free operating lamp: After switching on the lamp, electric and photometric parameters as well as the ambient temperature must be measured at intervals of no longer than 30 seconds. As the lamp stabilizes at 25 C, luminous flux will increase without exceeding its maximum value. The measurement value can be seen stable as soon as relative changes in the luminous flux and the lamp voltage are less than 0.25 % over five minutes. Our experience: total measurement time necessary is about 15 minutes. If this stability isn t reached, the lamp will not reach its state of equilibrium. As a result the measurement time has to be lengthened or the complete measurement has to be repeated entirely after a renewed stabilization period. If the lamp goes above its maximum on luminous flux and the following measurements indicate 2 % lower values then it can be stated that the lamp wasn t stabilized. The measurement is invalid under those circumstances. Measurement of the lamp in a light fitting, luminous flux of the light fitting: Mounting the lamp in the lampholder from the light fitting should be carried out according to the handling guidelines which can be found under Transport of stabilized double capped lamps for measurement. The light fitting can either be used in vertical position (lamp etch side facing down) or horizontally. After the lamps have been switched-on, the position of the light fitting shouldn t be changed. Measurement equipment with a fix measuring head and a moving light fitting isn t recommended. To ensure a correct measurement, it s necessary that the system of the light fitting/lamp/ecg reach its state of equilibrium before any measurement is realised. This time depends heavily from the construction of the light fitting. If the lamp is switched-off for more than 30 minutes, then it has to stabilize for an additional 20 hours. Transport of stabilized single capped fluorescent lamps T5 FC for measurement: The 100 h aged, T5 lamps must be transported to the measurement point in the laboratory in horizontal or vertical position (etch side, facing down) in a vibration free manner. The lamps should be aged for 30 minutes in the goniometer before measurement in a horizontal or vertical operating position at room temperature. Repeat this procedure afterwards for lamps that will be measured in the goniometer in a light fitting. In case of a twin lamp light fitting both etch side of the lamp should face each other in the light fitting. Measurements should be executed immediately after the pre-burning period of 30 minutes. The lamp may be switched-off for maximum 30 minutes. 190

192 When mounting the lamp horizontally in the goniometer or in the light fitting that is mounted in the goniometer, it must be ensured that this is realised without any disturbance to the lamp and ensure that the cold spot remains the lowest point of the lamp. If the lamp is switched-off for more than 30 minutes, then it has to stabilize for an additional 20 hours. Measurement of the free operating lamp: After switching on the lamp, electric and photometric parameters as well as the ambient temperature must be measured at intervals of no longer than 30 seconds. As the lamp stabilizes at 25 C, luminous flux will increase without exceeding its maximum value. The measurement value can be seen stable as soon as relative changes in the luminous flux and the lamp voltage are less than 0.25 % over five minutes. Our experience: total measurement time necessary is about 15 minutes. If this stability isn t reached, the lamp will not reach its state of equilibrium. As a result the measurement time has to be lengthened or the complete measurement has to be repeated entirely after a renewed stabilization period. If the lamp goes above its maximum on luminous flux and the following measurements indicate 2 % lower values then it can be stated that the lamp wasn t stabilized. The measurement is invalid under those circumstances. Measurement of the lamp in a light fitting, luminous flux of the light fitting: Mounting the lamp in the lampholder from the light fitting should be carried out according to the handling guidelines which can be found under Transport of stabilized double capped lamps for measurement. The light fitting can either be used in vertical position (lamp etch side facing down) or horizontally. After the lamps have been switched-on, the position of the light fitting shouldn t be changed. Measurement equipment with a fix measuring head and a moving light fitting isn t recommended. To ensure a correct measurement, it s necessary that the system of the light fitting/lamp/ecg reach its state of equilibrium before any measurement is realised. This time depends heavily from the construction of the light fitting. If the lamp is switched-off for more than 30 minutes, then it has to stabilize for an additional 20 hours. Transport of stabilized double capped fluorescent lamps T5 HE SLS, T5 HO SLS, T5 Short and T5 EL Short for measurement: The 100 h aged, T5 lamps must be transported to the measurement point in the laboratory in horizontal position in a vibration free manner. The lamps should be aged for 30 minutes in the goniometer before measurement in a horizontal position at room temperature. Repeat this procedure afterwards for lamps that will be measured in the goniometer in a light fitting. Measurements should be executed immediately after the pre-burning period of 30 minutes. The lamp may be switched-off for maximum 30 minutes. When mounting the lamp horizontally in the goniometer or in the light fitting which is mounted in the goniometer, it must be ensured that this is realised without any disturbance to the lamp and ensure that the cold spot remains the lowest point of the lamp. If the lamp is switched-off for more than 30 minutes, then it has to stabilize for an additional 20 hours. Measurement of the free operating lamp: After switching on the lamp, electric and photometric parameters as well as the ambient temperature must be measured at intervals of no longer than 30 seconds. As the lamp stabilizes at 25 C, luminous flux will increase without exceeding its maximum value. The measurement value can be seen stable as soon as relative changes in the luminous flux and the lamp voltage are less than 0.25 % over five minutes. Our experience: total measurement time necessary is about 15 minutes. If this stability isn t reached, the lamp will not reach its state of equilibrium. As a result the measurement time has to be lengthened or the complete measurement has to be repeated entirely after a renewed stabilization period. If the lamp goes above its maximum on luminous flux and the following measurements indicate 2 % lower values then it can be stated that the lamp wasn t stabilized. The measurement is invalid under those circumstances. 191

193 Measurement of the lamp in a light fitting, luminous flux of the light fitting: Mounting the lamp in the lampholder from the light fitting should be carried out according to the handling guidelines which can be found under Transport of stabilized double capped lamps for measurement. The light fitting can either be used in vertical position or horizontally. After the lamps have been switched-on, the position of the light fitting shouldn t be changed. Measurement equipment with a fix measuring head and a moving light fitting isn t recommended. To ensure a correct measurement, it s necessary that the system of the light fitting/lamp/ecg or CCG reach its state of equilibrium before any measurement is realised. This time depends heavily from the construction of the light fitting. If the lamp is switched-off for more than 30 minutes, then it has to stabilize for an additional 20 hours. 192

194 7.4 Electrical measurements All the cables, control gear and instruments must be arranged, and if necessary shielded, so that there is no chance of interference from external fields. Use instruments which will supply the level of accuracy required in the measured values. Recommendations Instruments: RMS instruments (true RMS) Accuracy: ±0.2 % of the measuring range Area of application Frequency: Crest factor: Hz (CCG) scanning rate khz (ECG) scanning rate > 2 (CCG) > 3 (ECG) Lamp supply: Supply voltage: Depending on the lamp and control gear (magnetic, electronic or reference device) Stability: ± 0.2 % during the measurement Total harmonic < 3 % distortion: Suitable supply: Noise-free mains Electronically Regulated stabilisers Rotary measuring generators Electronic generators The apparent power of supply unit should be five times the rated system power. 7.5 Temperature measurements The luminous flux and hence the luminous efficacy of single and double capped fluorescent lamps depend on the temperature. To achieve optimum operating conditions for the lamp in the light fitting, it is therefore essential to know either the ambient temperature in the vicinity of the lamp or the cold spot temperature directly on the lamp Ambient temperature Unless otherwise indicated, the lamp data in this guide is based on an ambient temperature of 25 C ± 1 C in draught free air in accordance with IEC and IEC Lamp data as a function of actual ambient temperature or cold spot temperature is also measured in draught free air. 193

195 7.5.2 Cold spot temperature for lamps without amalgam The cold spot temperature depends on the operating position and is approximately 49 C warm (optimum operating conditions). In the horizontal operating position and no air circulation, temperature measuring point for the different lamp types (see 4.8 Lamp temperature, safety and limit values) generally corresponds to the cold spot. The cold spot can however shift as a result of different operating positions or other influences. To determine the temperature at the measuring point (not in the case of a single capped fluorescent lamp circular shape T5 FC) thermocouples (NiCr-Ni thermo-elements) are fixed with a neutral, translucent adhesive. To avoid an accidental release of the thermocouple, it is highly recommended to secure it with a small transparent cable tie (temperature resistance of the material > 120 C) throughout the whole measurement. Refer to the picture below. Fig. 121: Fluorescent lamps, cold spot location measuring point T8 Fig. 122: Fluorescent lamps, cold spot location measuring point T5 HE and HO We do not recommend fixing the thermocouple on a measuring point of the lamp, the ECG or lampholder with an adhesive strip. Temperature reading errors can t be avoided as the thermocouple measuring point will never have on good contact with the glass surface. If temperature measurements have to be realised on a T5 HE SEAMLESS or a T5 HO SEAMLESS then it is important to know that three separated thermocouples have to be used. One contacted in the middle of the glass tube of the lamp and one on each end of the glass tube (location of the cold spot, not the glass end containing the electrode), see Fig When several SEAMLESS lamps are mounted in line, the cold spot from some lamps will shift if temperature is measured with a thermocouple on each end of the glass tube then it is easier to define the cold spot of each line. By adapting the design of the light fitting and the distance between each lamp end it is possible then to define best cold spot location. Cold Spot Cold Spot Glass wall Cold Spot Fig. 123: Fluorescent lamps cold spot location and glass wall temperature location measuring point T5 HE SEAMLESS and T5 HO SEAMLESS 194

196 7.5.3 Measuring T5 HO CONSTANT lamps CONSTANT lamps are designed for a wide temperature range. They therefore achieve their optimum operating conditions (> 90 % of rated luminous flux) in the temperature range from 15 C up to 70 C. If photometric measurements are taken under reference conditions (an ambient temperature of 25 C), it must be remembered that the measured luminous flux may be up to 10 % below the maximum luminous flux that the lamp can produce. Please refer to the luminous flux/ ambient temperature relation graphs (see 4.6) for detailed information. 7.6 Reference lamps Reference lamps (luminous flux and electrical values) can be obtained from the accredited test laboratory of OSRAM AG (DAR register number: DAT-P-043/94-00, Lighting Technology). Single capped fluorescent circular shape T5 FC lamps for measurements are also available with thermocouples fixed at the measuring point. For prices and delivery times please contact: OSRAM GmbH Dept: LP LPD EM Parkring Garching Tel.: (+49) Fax.: (+49)

197 8 Single and double capped fluorescent lamps and the environment 8.1 Contents Like all discharge lamps, single and double capped fluorescent lamps are sealed systems, if used as prescribed. Therefore they do not have any effect on the environment apart from emitting light. The most important substance in discharge lamps as far as the environment is concerned is mercury. Discharge lamps must contain some mercury in order to generate light. By using a patented dosing procedure, OSRAM has succeeded in reducing the amount of mercury in most models to the currently minimum needed to guarantee reliable operation of around 1.3 mg per lamp. 8.2 Waste disposal WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) regulations state that in the EU since July 1, 2005 all old electrical equipment including failed discharge lamps must be sent for proper recycling. For private consumers this means that they will have to hand the old lamps in to local recycling centres free of charge. In the B2B sector (Business to Business), discharge lamps with mercury residue qualify as waste requiring special supervision (special waste code) with a corresponding duty to dispose them carefully. This applies for example to mercury vapour lamps and (compact) fluorescent lamps. In Germany this is, today, regulated by the Kreislaufwirtschaftsgesetz and its legislation. All the above-mentioned lamps affected by the WEEE regulations have a symbol on the packaging showing a dustbin with a line through it. Recommendations in case of a fluorescent lamp breakage: Hg exposition should be minimized as much as possible independently of the risk. Since mercury distributes at ground level, children and pets should leave the room Open the windows and leave the room for at least 15 minutes. Whenever possible, make sure there is an air draft in the room To protect yourself from cuts with glass shards, plastic gloves should be used whenever available After ventilation, gather large glass pieces in a glass jar with lid If the lamp broke on an even surface (tiles, parquet, linoleum etc.), collect smaller glass pieces with two pieces of cardboard or a hand broom. The broom has then to be wiped with damp cloth. Thoroughly wipe the surface at least two times If the breakage happened on carpet it is recommended to vacuum the carpet for at least 5 minutes with open windows. Afterwards, ventilate the room for 15 minutes and repeat procedure at least two times, especially when a hot or old lamp was broken If possible, clean and air carpet outdoors (at least one day), especially when a hot or old lamp was broken If a vacuum cleaner was used, immediately remove bag or thoroughly clean dust container. Diligently wipe brush with damp cloth. To conclude vacuum cleaner cleaning, leave it running outdoors for at least 15 minutes All used materials (plastic gloves, pieces of cardboard, cloth, vacuum cleaner bag and dust from bag less vacuum cleaner) can be disposed of as household waste, but should immediately be taken out of the building Lamp remains and glass shards should be taken to the municipality/lamp collection point The room should be left ventilated even after all lamp remains have been removed 196

198 8.3 ROHS Directive and conformity for single and double capped fluorescent lamps Postal adress Office adress OSRAM OSRAM AG Munich Chairman oft Managin g board: Commercial registry: 197

199 198

200 9 European and international standards 9.1 Relevant standards Lamps and caps Single and double capped fluorescent lamps comply with all relevant European and international standards listed in the following table (see also 9.2 Declaration of Conformity): German European International Single-capped fluorescent lamps Performance specifications Single-capped fluorescent lamps Safety specifications DIN EN (VDE 0715 Part 7) DIN EN (VDE 0715 Part 9) EN IEC EN IEC Double capped fluorescent lamps Performance specifications DIN EN EN IEC Double capped fluorescent lamps safety specifications DIN EN EN IEC Lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the control of interchangeability and safety DIN EN EN IEC

201 9.1.2 Accessories The following table shows the most important standards that apply to accessories: Accessories relevant standards German European International Lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the control of interchangeability and safety DIN EN EN IEC Part 2: Lampholders DIN EN EN IEC Part 3: Gauges DIN EN Band I und II EN IEC Part 4: Guidelines and general information DIN EN EN IEC Glow starters for fluorescent lamps DIN VDE 0712 Part 101 EN IEC Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps General and safety requirements Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps Performance requirements DIN EN (VDE 0712 Part 10) DIN EN (VDE 0712 Part 11) EN IEC EN IEC DC-supplied electronic control gear for tubular fluorescent lamps General and safety requirements DIN EN (VDE 0712 Part 20) EN IEC AC-supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps General and safety requirements AC-supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps Performance requirements DIN EN (VDE 0712 Part 22) DIN EN (VDE 0712 Part 23) EN IEC EN IEC Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Section 2: Limits for harmonic currents emissions (Equipment input current 16A per phase) DIN EN (VDE 0838 Part 2) EN IEC Capacitors for use in tubular fluorescent and other discharge lamp circuits General and safety requirements Capacitors for use in tubular fluorescent and other discharge lamp circuits Performance requirements DIN EN (VDE 0560 Part 61) DIN EN (VDE 0560 Part 62) EN IEC EN IEC

202 9.1.3 Light fittings The following table shows the most important standards that apply to light fittings: Luminaires relevant standards German European International Suppression of radio disturbances caused by electrical appliances and systems; limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of electrical lighting and similar equipment Equipment for general lighting purposes, EMC immunity requirements DIN EN VDE 0875 Part 15 EN CISPR 15 DIN EN EN IEC Luminaires DIN EN EN IEC Part 1: General requirements and tests Fixed general purpose luminaires DIN EN EN IEC DIN EN EN IEC Recessed luminaires DIN EN EN IEC Luminaires for road and street lighting Portable general purpose luminaires DIN EN EN IEC DIN EN EN IEC Floodlights DIN EN EN IEC Luminaires with built-in transformers for filament lamps DIN EN EN IEC Portable luminaires for garden use DIN EN EN IEC Handlamps DIN VDE 0711 Part 208 EN IEC Photo and film luminaires (non-professional) Portable child-appealing luminaires Luminaires for stage lighting, television and film studios (outdoor and indoor) Luminaires for swimming pools and similar applications Air-handling luminaires (safety requirements) DIN EN (VDE 0711 Part 9) EN IEC DIN EN EN IEC DIN VDE 0711 Part 217 EN IEC DIN EN EN IEC DIN EN VDE 0711 Part 2-19 EN IEC Lighting chains DIN EN EN IEC Luminaires for emergency lighting DIN EN EN IEC Luminaires for use in clinical areas of hospitals and health care buildings Electrical supply track systems for luminaires Dental equipment Dental operating light Specifications for light fittings with service voltages below 1000 V DIN EN VDE 0711 Part 225 DIN EN VDE 0711 Part 300 E DIN EN DIN VDE 0710 EN IEC EN IEC pr EN ISO ISO 9680 not yet available 1) not yet General requirements DIN VDE 0710 Part 1 available ISO not yet available not yet available Special provisions for lamps operated under adverse conditions DIN VDE 0710 Part 4 1) not yet available not yet available 201

203 Luminaires relevant standards German European International Specification rules for flush-fitting signal-light fittings DIN VDE 0710 Part 11 1) not yet available 1) not yet Luminaires for aquariums DIN VDE 0710 Part 12 available 1) not yet To ball throwing luminaires safety DIN VDE 0710 Part 13 available 1) not yet Luminaires for building-in furniture DIN VDE 0710 Part 14 available Existing German standard for which there is currently no international counterpart not yet available not yet available not yet available not yet available Miscellaneous German European International International Lamp Coding System (ILCOS) See also 10. DIN IEC TS Sources Standards can be obtained from: DIN Deutsche Normen DIN VDE Normen Publisher DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.v. Burggrafenstraße 6 D Berlin DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.v. Burggrafenstraße 6 D Berlin Sales office Beuth Verlag Gmb D Berlin Beuth Verlag GmbH D Berlin VDE-Verlag GmbH Bismarckstr. 33 D Berlin IEC Standards IEC Central Office 3, rue Varembé CH Genf Beuth Verlag GmbH Berlin VDE-Verlag GmbH Bismarckstr. 33 D Berlin 202

204 9.2 Declaration of Conformity OSRAM 203

205 204

206 205

207 206

208 207

209 9.3 CE labelling The CE label on single and double capped fluorescent lamp packaging and on the declarations of conformity indicates compliance with low-voltage guidelines (safety requirements in accordance with EN and EN 61195). Here are some points to bear in mind about CE labelling: The CE label is intended first and foremost for administrative authorities, not end users. The CE label in mandatory for the sale of products that can be used independently within the EU. It is purely an administrative label. It is not a seal of quality or approval mark. The CE label is based on the declaration of conformity issues by manufacturers on their own responsibility. It is not based on testing by a recognised independent inspectorate. The CE label acts as a passport. It promotes free trade within Europe. The European directive 245/2009 with respect to energy using products (ErP) is part of the CE requirements starting March Energy Efficiency Index Commission Directive 98/11/EC: Energy labelling for Household Lamps: The EEI (Energy Efficiency Index, e.g. EEI = A), also known as the energy label, classifies lamps according to their energy efficiency (it does not relate to luminaires). Directive 98/11/EC for implementing Directive 92/75/EEC has been in force since April The seven classes are defined by certain limit values in lamp output. Lamps in class A are the most efficient at converting electrical into light. The classification of single and double capped fluorescent lamps is given in the OSRAM Lighting Program. Commission delegated regulation (EU) N 874/2012 of July 2012 supplementing directive 2010/30/EU of the European Parliament and of the council with regard to energy labelling of electrical lamps and luminaires. Released to the public September 26 th, 2012 in the official register of the European union Coming into force October 16 th, 2012 Be in force for Lamps/Illuminant: September 1st, 2013 One part of the advertising specifications for March 1st, 2014 lamps/illuminant and the new specifications for light fittings enter in force from: Which lamps/illuminant need new EU-Energy label Which lamps doesn t need an EU-Energy label? respectively additional product information? Incandescent incl. halogen reflector lamps Lamps and LED module luminous flux < 30 lm. Fluorescent lamps, CFLi, CFLni Market for battery operation HID Lamps Basically not developed for Illumination applications, e.g. Photoflash, video projectors, IR lps. LED lamps and module also when they are part of the furniture or can be bought as spare part. 208

210 ILCOS Code ILCOS code, e.g. for light colour LUMILUX 840: Lamp reference W ILCOS code T8 LUMILUX 15 FD-15/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-16/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-18/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-23/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-30/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-36/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-38/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-58/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-70/40/1B-E-G13-26/1800 T8 LUMILUX DE LUXE 18 FD-18/40/1A-E-G13-26/ FD-36/40/1A-E-G13-26/ FD-58/40/1A-E-G13-26/1500 T8 LUMILUX COLOR control 18 FD-18/40/1A-E-G13-26/ FD-36/40/1A-E-G13-26/ FD-58/40/1A-E-G13-26/1500 T8 LUMILUX SPLIT control 18 FD-18/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-36/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-58/40/1B-E-G13-26/1500 T8 COLORED 18 FD-18/RED-E-G13-26/ FD-18/YELLOW-E-G13-26/ FD-18/GREEN-E-G13-26/ FD-18/BLUE-E-G13-26/ FD-36/RED-E-G13-26/ FD-36/YELLOW-E-G13-26/ FD-36/GREEN-E-G13-26/ FD-36/BLUE-E-G13-26/ FD-58/RED-E-G13-26/ FD-58/YELLOW-E-G13-26/ FD-58/GREEN-E-G13-26/ FD-58/BLUE-E-G13-26/1500 T8 LUMILUX XT 18 FD-18/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-36/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-58/40/1B-E-G13-26/1500 T8 LUMILUX XXT 18 FD-18/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-36/40/1B-E-G13-26/ FD-58/40/1B-E-G13-26/1500 T5 LUMILUX HE HIGH EFFICIENCY 14 FDH-14/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-21/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-28/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-35/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/

211 Lamp reference W ILCOS code T5 HE COLORED 14 FDH-14/RED/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-14/GREEN/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-14/BLUE/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-21/RED/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-21/GREEN/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-21/BLUE/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-28/RED/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-28/GREEN/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-28/BLUE/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-35/RED/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-35/GREEN/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-35/BLUE/1B-L/P-G5-16/1449 T5 LUMILUX HO HIGH OUTPUT 24 FDH-24/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-39/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-49/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-54/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-80/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/1449 T5 HO LUMILUX DE LUXE 24 FDH-24/40/A-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-49/40/A-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-54/40/A-L/P-G5-16/1149 T5 HO COLORED 24 FDH-24/RED/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-24/GREEN/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-24/BLUE/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-39/RED/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-39/GREEN/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-39/BLUE/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-54/RED/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-54/GREEN/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-54/BLUE/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-80/RED/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-80/GREEN/L/P-G5-16/ FDH-80/BLUE/L/P-G5-16/1449 T5 HE LUMILUX ES 25 FDH-25/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-32/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/1449 T5 HO LUMILUX ES 45 FDH-45/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-50/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-73/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/1449 T5 HO LUMILUX CONSTANT 24 FDH-24/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-39/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-49/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-54/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-80/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/1449 T5 HO LUMILUX XT 54 FDH-54/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-80/40/1B-L/P-G5-16/1449

212 Lamp reference W ILCOS code T5 HE and HO LUMILUX SPLIT control 28 FDH-28/40/1B-L/P-G FDH-54/40/1B-L/P-G T5 LUMILUX FC 22 FC-22/40/1B-E-2Gx FC-40/40/1B-E-2Gx FC-55/40/1B-E-2Gx13-16 T5 LUMILUX SHORT 8 FD-8/40/1B-E-G5-16/ FD-13/40/1B-E-G5-16/517 T5 SHORT BASIC 4 FDH-4/40/2B-L/P-G5-16/136 6 FDH-6/40/2B-L/P-G5-16/212 8 FDH-8/40/2B-L/P-G5-16/ FDH-13/40/2B-L/P-G5-16/

213 10 Bibliography Lamps and lighting, J.R. Coaton and A.M Marsden Taschenbuch der Lampentechnik, OSRAM CIE Publ. No International Lighting Vocabulary All relevant IEC or EN standards for lamps, CCG, ECG, luminaires and others Not- und Sicherheitsbeleuchtung, Bruno Weis, Hans Finke Technisch-wissenschaftliche Abhandlungen der OSRAM-Gesellschaft Aus der Entwicklung der Lichtquellentechnik, A. Lompe Anodische Entladungserscheinungen und Rauschverhalten von Leuchtstofflampen, G. Franck und F. Schipp Der Hg Dampfdruck von Indiumamalgamlampen und die Lichtstrom-Temperaturkurve der neuen Indiumamalgam-Leuchtstofflampen, D. Hofmann und E. G. Rasch Der Farbwiedergabe-Index in der lichttechnischen Praxis, W. Münch und U. Schultz Der Betrieb von Leuchtstofflampen an elektronischen Vorschaltgeräten: H.-J. Fähnrich und E. Rasch Betriebsgeräte und Schaltungen für elektrische Lampen, C.H. Sturm / E. Klein BBC Brown Boveri, Vorschaltgeräte und Schaltungen für Niederspannungsentladungslampen, Dr.-Ing C.H. Sturm Internet catalogue Vossloh Schwabe GmbH Internet catalogue BJB GmbH & Co. KG Internet catalogue AAG Stucchi CIE 13.3 method of measuring and specifying colour rendering properties of light sources Handbuch der Beleuchtung, Lange Additional sources: Electric discharge lamps, John F. Waymouth Licht und Beleuchtung, Theorie und Praxis der Lichttechnik, Hans-Juergen Hentschel Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia Fördergemeinschaft gutes Licht Industriebeleuchtung, Bruno Weis CIE 84 measurement of luminous flux 11 Attachments Consult part 2 of the technical guide 212

214 NEW! OSRAM Lamp Finder Professional the free app As the name suggests, the new OSRAM Lamp Finder Professional app for Apple and Android smartphones and tablets will help you to find the right lamp for your particular requirements. OSRAM GmbH Hauptverwaltung Marcel-Breuer-Straße München Fon +49 (0) Fax +49 (0) /13 Subject to change without notice. Errors and omissions excepted.